Keyboard Shortcuts

REPRESENTATION FOR PARTS Wire frame CTRL + 1 Shaded wire frame CTRL + 2 Rendered (black) CTRL + 3 Rendered CTRL + 4 Rendered (dark colors) CTRL + 5 REPRESENTATION FOR COMPONENT PARTS Wire frame SHIFT + 1 Shaded wire frame SHIFT + 2 Rendered (black) SHIFT + 3 Rendered SHIFT + 4 Rendered (dark colors) SHIFT + 5 GENERAL SHORTCUTS Open Save Properties Undo Redo Interrupt Repeat the last command Copy CHANGED! Move CHANGED! Delete Drag and drop Pan Middle button pan CHANGED! Move right Move left Move down Move up Center by cursor Zoom original Zoom in/out Zoom previous Rotate using mouse Rotate using keyboard Ortho Relative coordinate input Absolute coordinate input Next position Previous position Xsnap SmartSelect Select lter Add to selection Toggle selection Lock X, Y or Z coordinates

Select all select switch Select parts select switch Snap to reference lines/points Snap to geometry lines/points Snap to nearest points Snap to any position Advanced options Inquire object Free measure MODELING SHORTCUTS Create new model Open the Views list Create clip plane Rollover highlight Set view rotation point Autorotate CHANGED! Disable view rotation 3D / Plane Fly (in perspective views) Select all Select assembly Hide object Snapshot Undo last polygon pick Finish polygon input Open component catalog Create AutoConnection Phase manager Clash check Drawing Wizard Drawing list Clone drawing Print drawings Create report

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 CTRL + E SHIFT + I F

CTRL + O CTRL + S ALT + ENTER CTRL + Z CTRL + Y ESC ENTER CTRL + C CTRL + M DEL D P SHIFT + M x z y w INS HOME PG UP/PG DN END CTRL + R CTRL + arrow keys, SHIFT + arrow keys O @, R $, A TAB SHIFT + TAB T S CTRL + G SHIFT CTRL X, Y or Z

CTRL + N CTRL + I SHIFT + X H V SHIFT + R, SHIFT + T F8 CTRL + P SHIFT + F CTRL + A ALT + object SHIFT + H F9, F10, F11, F12 Backspace Space bar CTRL + F CTRL + J CTRL + H SHIFT + C CTRL + W CTRL + L CTRL + D SHIFT + P CTRL + B

DRAWING SHORTCUTS SHIFT + A Associative symbol Black and white drawing B Ghost outline SHIFT + G Open next drawing CTRL + PG DN Open previous drawing CTRL + PG UP Create an orthogonal dimension G USER COORDINATE SYSTEM (UCS) SHORTCUTS Set coordinate system origin U Set coordinate system by two points SHIFT + U Toggle orientation CTRL + T Reset current CTRL + 1 Reset all CTRL + 0

Keyboard Shortcuts

DEFINING SHORTCUTS
If you frequently use certain commands, assign keyboard shortcuts to them. You will nd it faster than using the icons and menus. To assign a shortcut to a command: Click Tools > Customize... to open the Customize dialog box. Click on the command on the list on the left. Use the Filter list box to nd commands easily. Click the down arrow to select subgroups of commands. ALL displays all the commands available in Tekla Structures. You can also type in the command name to search for commands. Use the Shortcut elds to assign a shortcut to the command. You can use a single letter, or combine a letter with the Shift, Alt or Ctrl key. Move the command to the Menu list by clicking the right arrow. This will activate the shortcut and also add the command in the User menu. Click Close to exit the Customize dialog box. For more information, see Online help, Appendix E > Reserved shortcuts.

Basic Modeling 1

Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 19, 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents

Basic Modeling 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Start Tekla Structures Create a New Model BasicModel1 Create Grids Create Plane Views along Gridlines Create Foundations Create Columns Create Beams Create Slabs

5
6 7 10 12 16 21 26 41

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

Basic Modeling 1

In this lesson

We will go through the basic functions of Tekla Structures: How to create a new structural 3D model, and how to create grids (i.e. module lines), grid views and structural members in the model. As a result of this lesson the model will look as shown below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

1.1 Start Tekla Structures

Start Tekla Structures

To start Tekla Structures, click the Windows Start button. Navigate through Programs > Tekla Structures > Tekla Structures enu Europe. This will start Tekla Structures in European environment using English language.

The modeling user interface is now opened. At first, most of the menu options and all the icons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open an existing model or create a new model, the icons and available menu options become active.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

1.2 Create a New Model BasicModel1

To start a new model, you first need to create an empty model database with a unique name. In this lesson use the name BasicModel1.
Start a new model

1.

Select File > New from the pull-down menu or click the New model icon in the Standard toolbar to open the New model dialog box.

2.

At the center of the dialog box, Tekla Structures suggests the name "New Model" for the model. The full path of the model folder is shown in the first field.

3.

Replace the name "New Model" by BasicModel1.

4.

Click the OK button (or Enter) to create the new model.

The menus and icons become activated and the model name appears in the title bar of the Tekla Structures window. Every model must have a unique name. Tekla Structures does not allow duplicate model names. Do not use special marks ( / \ ; : | ) in model names.

You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that model.

Tekla Structures automatically created a grid and a view according to the saved standard view properties. The default 3D view and grid are shown below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

Cyan dash-and-dot lines show the projections of the grids which are visible on the view plane. Tekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using green, dashed lines. For more information, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Basics.
Save the model

To save the model: 5. Select File > Save from the pull-down menu or click the Save icon in the Standard toolbar.

Remember to save your model every now and then, and always when opening another model or exiting Tekla Structures.

Tekla Structures includes also an auto save feature that backs up and saves your work automatically at set intervals. These are set in the Autosave properties dialog box obtained from the Setup > Autosave pull-down menu. For more information on saving and auto saving, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Basics > Saving a model and exiting Tekla Structures Most commands of Tekla Structures are found both in menus (main or pop-up) and in toolbars (icons). In this training manual we will mainly use the pop-up menu to activate commands.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures: Icons Commands in main pull-down menu Commands in pop-up menu By default all the commands are found in pull-down menu, and most of them in the icons. A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button (right-click). If you have an object selected, the commands on the pop-up menu relate to that object.

For more information on Tekla Structures screen layout and toolbars, see: Help: Modeling > Introduction > Screen layout Help: Modeling > Introduction > Toolbars

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

1.3 Create Grids

To create the appropriate grid for BasicModel1 as shown above, you can delete the existing grid and create a new one from the Points > Grid pull-down menu. Alternatively you can modify the existing grid.
Modify the existing grid

To modify the existing grid: 1. 2. Double-click on the gridline. Complete the appearing Grid dialog box as shown below by filling in the X, Y and Z coordinates and the labels for the gridlines.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

10

3. 4.

Click Modify to apply the new grid values. Enter the grid file name, GRID1, and click the Save as button to save the grid values for later use. The settings are saved in the file GRID1.grd, which is stored in the attributes subfolder of your model folder.

For more information on grids and dialog box buttons, see: Help: Modeling > Introduction > Inputting information > Common buttons The number of decimals used in the Grid dialog box (as well as in other modeling dialog boxes) can be controlled from the Units and decimals... dialog box obtained from the Setup pull-down menu.

When the grid was modified, the work area of the view, shown with the green dashed line, was not updated.
Fit work area

To fit the work area according to the modified grid: 1. 2. Click the view to activate it. Right-click and select Fit work area from the pop-up menu.

The view should now look as shown below:

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

11

1.4 Create Plane Views along Gridlines

We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines created in the previous section. A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its own window inside the Tekla Structures window. Each view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellow crosses. Points outside the view plane appear as red dots. For more information, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views.
Create grid views

To create views along gridlines, 1. 2. Select one gridline. Right-click and select Create view > Grid views from the pop-up menu to open the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

3. 4.

Change the View properties as shown above and click the Show button of the XY view plane to open the View properties dialog box. Change the View depth values as shown below and click OK to close the dialog box.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

12

5.

Select the number of views as All and click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

The Views dialog box appears presenting all the created views. All invisible named views are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right.

For more information on view properties, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > View properties
Display or hide views

To display or hide views: 1. Click the Open named view list icon to open the Views dialog box (which is now already open).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

13

2. 3.

Select the view(s) you want to display or hide. Use the arrows to move view(s) from left to right (visible) or vice versa (invisible).

Do not keep too many views open at the same time. Nine is the maximum number of open views. You can open or close named views by clicking the Open named view list icon. Delete unnecessary views from the view list. To switch between views, press Ctrl+Tab.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

14

Rotate the model

You can rotate the model in a 3D view with rendered view type. 1. 2. 3. Press the key v. In the view, pick a center of rotation. Hold down the Ctrl key, and click and drag with the middle mouse button.

Change between 3D / Plane

With the shortcut Ctrl+P you can change the view angle between 3D and Plane, which is very useful.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

15

1.5 Create Foundations

We will now create foundations for the BasicModel1.

Column footing
1800*1800 footing

To create footings for columns: 1. Double-click on the Create pad footing icon. This will open Pad footing properties dialog box.

2.

Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown below and click Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

16

3. 4.

In the 3d view, pick the grid intersection A-1 to create the footing. Create the rest of the 1800*1800 footings at other intersections of gridline A by picking each position.

Help: Modeling > Parts > Part location > Position on work plane Help: Modeling > Parts > Part location > Position depth Help: Modeling > Parts > Part properties > Profile You can undo (and redo) previous commands one by one since the last save by clicking the icons or typing Ctrl + Z (Undo) and Ctrl + Y (Redo).

2700*2700 footing

While still in the command, 5. Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box for a 2700*2700 footing as shown below and Apply this. The footings on gridline B need offsetting from the gridline because there will be additional columns modeled afterwards. This offset will be accomplished by adjusting the Vertical Position value in the Pad footing properties dialog box.

6. 7.

Create the footings at intersections of the gridline B. Right click and select Interrupt to end the command.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

17

The commands will stay active until you interrupt them. To end commands, right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu, or press the Esc key. To restart the last command used, press Enter.

Foundations for silos parametric profiles

We will create two identical circular foundations for the silos. At first, one foundation will be created at the coordinate 4500,4500,0 and then the other foundation will be created as a copy of the first one. Tekla Structures contains standard (library), parametric, and user-defined profiles. For the foundation, we will use parametric profiles. Help: Modeling > Parts > Part properties > Profile Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Appendix A: Parametric Profiles

Create footing

1.

Double-click on the Create pad footing icon.

2.

Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown below and click Apply. You can select the profile for a part from the Select profile dialog box that opens next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box. You can as well enter a profile name in the Profile field in the part properties dialog box.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

18

3.

Type 4500,4500 to define the position for the footing (typing the numbers automatically displays the Enter a numeric location dialog box).

4.

Press Enter (or click OK) and the foundation is created.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Tools > Snapping
Copy the footing

1. 2. 3.

Click the footing once to select it. Right click and select Copy special > Translate from the pop-up menu.. Click copy.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

19

Now the footings should look as shown below:

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

20

1.6 Create Columns

We will first create two of the columns and then use the Copy command to create the other columns. You can create your columns and beams either in steel or concrete! Follow the left side of the instruction for steel and the right side for concrete.

Create steel/concrete columns

To create the first two columns.

Create steel columns

1. Double-click on the Create column icon.

Create concrete columns

1. Double-click on the Create concrete column icon.

2. Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below.

2. Complete the Concrete column properties dialog box as shown below.

3. Complete the dialog's Position tab as shown below, and then click Apply.

3. Complete the dialog's Position tab as shown below, and then click Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

21

4.

Pick the intersection of gridlines A-1 to create one column, and then pick grid B-1 to create the second column.

Copy columns

1. 2.

Select the columns that you just created by dragging a window across them. Right click and select Copy special> Translate from the pop-up menu. Complete the dialog box as shown below and click Copy.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

22

Now all the columns appear in the model.

When you want to model identical structures, you can alternatively create one footing (and its reinforcement), the steel column on top of it and the base plate connection between the footing and the column, and copy this structural entity to all other positions of similar structures. You can select multiple parts in the model by holding down the Ctrl-key when selecting objects in the model.

Help: Modeling > Introduction > Selecting model objects > How to select objects

Silos
We will now model the steel silos by using solid parametric profiles. A more precise alternative would be to create the silo as a circular hollow section with a contour plate welded on top of it.
Create silos

1.

To create the silos, double-click on the Create column icon.

2.

Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below, and then click Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

23

3.

Pick the top point of the first silo footing and then the other.

Now the silos appear in the model.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

24

The visibility of objects in views depends on the work area, view depth, view setup, and view filter. You can also temporarily hide parts in a view by using the Hide tool (on the pop-up menu). In the pictures hereafter all the model objects created may not always be visible. Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > Displaying and hiding objects in views

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

25

1.7 Create Beams

Level 3850 beams
We will first create the beams at the +3850 level and then copy them (using the select filter) to the two upper levels. Again, you can create the beams either in steel or in concrete.
Create steel/concrete beams

1.

Open the PLAN +3850 view.

Create steel beams

2. Double-click on the Create beam icon.

Create concrete beams

2. Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.

3. Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown and Apply.

3. Complete the Concrete beam properties dialog box as shown.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

26

4. Complete the dialog's Position tab as shown below, and

Apply.

5. In the PLAN +3850 view pick the intersection of gridlines A-4 and then B-4.

5. In the PLAN +3850 view pick the intersection of gridlines A-4 and then B-4.

6. Continue at gridlines 5, 6, and 7.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

27

When inputting horizontal members always pick from left to right or from bottom to top for consistency purposes.

Copy beams to upper levels

Filter beams

1.

Choose the select filter option beam_filter from the drop down list. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Filter > Select filter

2.

By dragging the mouse, select an area in the model as shown below.

Copy beams

1.

Open the Grid 7 view, right-click and select Copy from the pop-up menu.

2. 3. 4.

Pick the gridline intersection B-3850 and then B-7350. Copy beams to level +13400 by repeating steps 1-2. Change the select filter option back to standard to enable also the selection of other objects than beams.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

28

Level 13400 beams

Next we will create beams at the view +13400 level.
Create grid beams

By using the same beam properties that we applied earlier, create the missing beams at the gridline intersections shown in the figure below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

29

Create the rest of the beams

Next we will create beams in locations where no gridlines intersect. The snapping tools help you pick points to position objects precisely without having to know the coordinates or layout additional lines or points. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Tools > Snapping

Create beam A

1. 2.

Double-click one of the existing beams in the model and press Apply. Start the beam command. 2. Start the concrete beam command.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

30

3.

Make sure only the Snap to reference lines / points icon of the two main snap switches on the right is pressed down.

4.

Make sure the Snap to mid points and Snap to end points icons are pressed down.

5.

Pick a midpoint of the beam between A2 and A-3 and then the midpoint of the beam between B-2 and B-3.

5. Pick a midpoint of the beam between A-2 and A-3 and then the midpoint of the beam between B-2 and B-3.

Create beam B

We will pick the start position of beam B by using the gridline intersection A-1 as a temporary reference point and tracking along gridline 1 in the direction of intersection B-1 for 9000 mm. We will then pick the second position of beam B using the temporary snap switch
Perpendicular.

Pick the first position of beam B

1.

Start the beam command.

1.

Start the concrete beam command.

2. 3.

Hold down the Ctrl key and pick gridline intersection A-1 as the origin to show the From location coordinates. Then use the cursor to snap (do not pick!!) in the correct direction (e.g. to gridline intersection B-1).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

31

4.

Type 9000 for the numeric location. (The Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically.)

5.
Pick second position of beam B

Press OK or Enter and the cursor snaps to the correct position. (=9000 mm from A-1 in the direction of B-1). Right click and select Perpendicular.

6.

7.

Pick the second position on beam A (see below).

7. Pick the second position on beam A (see below).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

32

Create beam C

While still in the beam command, 8. Right click and select Intersection for snap override.

9.

Pick the intersection of beam B and gridline 2 and then the intersection of gridlines B-2.

9. Pick the intersection of beam B and gridline 2 and then the intersection of gridlines B-2.

Create beam D

We will first create one of the beams that frame around the silo and then by using the Copy > Rotate command create the other three.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

33

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Edit>Copy >Rotate 1. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick gridline intersection A-1 to show the From location coordinates, use the cursor to snap (do not pick!!) in the correct direction. (E.g. grid intersection B-1). Type 4000 for the numeric location and press Enter, the cursor snaps to the correct position.

2.

3. 4. 5.

Type the letter O on the keyboard to snap to positions in orthogonal directions on the work plane (0, 45, 90, 135, and 180 degrees). Let the cursor snap to the midpoint as shown below and pick. Type the letter O to turn the ortho off.

Copy rotate the beam

1. 2.

Select the beam that you just created. Right click and select Copy special > Rotate from the pop-up menu.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

34

3.

Pick the center point of the silo as the point to define the rotation (select a view in which the silos are visible and pick near the circumference to snap to the center point). The origin X0 and Y0 values will appear in the dialog box. Complete the other fields in the dialog. Click Copy.

4. 5.
Copy translate the beam to the other silo

We will now copy the beams to the other silo. 1. 2. Select the beams shown highlighted in the picture below (press the Ctrl key to add parts to the selection).
Copy special > translate them 9000 mm in the x direction.

Bracing
Working in the Grid A elevation view, we will input the vertical steel bracing members using the Create beam tool.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

35

Create braces a and b

1. 2.

Double-click on the Create beam icon. Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown below and Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

36

3.

In the 3d view create brace a by first picking the gridline intersection A-2 and then the midpoint of column A-3.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

37

4.

Create brace b by picking the top position of column A-2 and then midpoint of column A-3.

Use handle to move brace end

We can see from the drawing above that the lower end of the brace needs 200 mm offsetting from the grid level. Now we will use handles to move the part end. Help: Modeling > Parts > Part location 1. Select brace a to display the handles.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

38

2. 3. 4. 5.
Copy mirror braces a and b

Select the yellow handle (Tekla Structures then highlights the handle). Right click and select Move special > Translate to move the handle 200 mm upwards. Click Move. Repeat the procedure to move brace bs top handle 1000 mm downwards. Select braces a and b. Right click and select Copy special > Mirror In the 3d view, pick grid A-3 then grid B-3 to define the mirror line. Click Copy.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Edit>Copy >Mirror Now we have modeled all the steel and concrete members in Model1. The model should look like in the picture below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

39

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

40

1.8 Create Slabs

Concrete hollow-core slabs

We will now create concrete hollow-core slabs. Instead of positioning the slabs to the gridline intersection we will model the slabs to the face of the steel columns.
Create hollowcore slabs

In the PLAN +13400 view: 1. Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.

2.

Complete the Concrete beam properties dialog box as shown and Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

41

If you have modeled steel columns and beams: 3. Pick the intersection of the column flange outer face and gridline 4 and then the intersection of the column flange outer face and gridline 5 (make sure that Snap to geometry lines/points is active).

If you have modeled concrete columns and beams: 3. Pick the intersection of the column outer border and gridline 4 and then the intersection of the column outer border and gridline 5 (make sure that Snap to geometry lines/points is active).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

42

Copy the slabs in y direction

1. 2. 3.

Select the slab that you just created. Right click and select Copy special > Translate from the pop-up menu. Type 1200 in the dY field of the Copy translate dialog box and 10 as the number of copies. Drag an area select, selecting all the concrete slabs. Right click and select Copy > Translate from the pop-up menu. Type 6000 in the dX field of the Copy - translate dialog box.

Copy the slabs in x direction

1. 2. 3.

4.

Click Copy.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

43

Copy hollow-core slabs to levels 7350 and 3850

Copy the slabs

1.

Hold down the Ctrl key and select all the hollow-core slabs by dragging 3 areas through the slabs.

2.

Still holding down the Ctrl key, pick the two slabs shown in the picture below to unselect them.

3. 4. 5.

Right click and select Copy special > Translate from the pop-up menu. Enter -6050 in the dZ field of the Copy special > Translate dialog box, click Copy. Enter -9550 in the dZ field of the Copy special > Translate dialog box, click Copy.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

44

Concrete slab

Start the slab command

1. 2.

Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon. Complete the Concrete slab properties dialog box as shown and Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

45

Pick positions for the slab

3.

In the PLAN +13400 view pick point A (intersection of column flange outer face and gridline 1, shown in the drawing above).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

46

4.

Let the cursor snap to the position just picked (do not pick!) and press y to lock the y coordinate.

5.

Let the cursor now snap to the end point of the beam near point B and pick.

6.

Press y to release the coordinate lock.

7.

Pick point C.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

47

8.

Pick point D.

9.

Click the middle mouse button to create the slab.

Copy concrete slab

1. 2.

Select the slab that you just created.

Copy translate the slab 9000 mm in x direction.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

48

Create in-situ slabs

Before we add reinforcements to concrete members we need to create additional 600 mm wide in-situ slabs beside the hollow-core slab area in first and second floors. For this, zoom in to first floor in gridlines A and 5 6. 1. 2. Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon. Set the profile height to 175 mm.

3. 4.

Press OK to close the dialog. Start picking the polygon shape at the middle of the hollow-core slab in gridline 5.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

49

5.

Write: R then add 0, 600, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK.

6. 7. 8.

Write: R then add 6050, 0, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK. Write: R then add 0, -600, to the Enter a numeric location dialog and press OK. Close the polygon with middle button.

Now select the slab and copy it 3500.00 mm in z-direction using Copy special > Translate right button command. Now the Model1 framework is finished.

Links to additional information

Help: Modeling > Introduction > General information > Single user mode vs multiuser mode Help: Modeling > Introduction > General information > Languages and environments

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 1

50

System Components for Precast Concrete

Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 19, 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE System Components for Precast Concrete

ii

Contents

Contents ................................................................................................................................ 1

System Components for Precast Concrete .............................................................. 2

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 About System Connections .......................................................................................................2 Create System Connections ......................................................................................................4 Create Rebars Using System Components .............................................................................15 Modify All the Corbel Connections...........................................................................................32

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE System Components for Precast Concrete

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE System Components for Precast Concrete

ii

System Components for Precast Concrete

In this lesson

This lesson introduces the basics of creating system components in Tekla Structures. You will learn how to: Create connection and reinforcement components Work with component properties Save the properties for later use.

2.1

About System Components

You can model connections, reinforcements, etc, quickly with the Tekla Structures system components. The greatest benefits of using system components are: The connection properties can be saved with a particular name so that they can be used later. These properties can then be used for all projects. When you modify a main object's profile in the model, all of the connections to the object are automatically modified at the same time. If you select options such as move or copy, all components are automatically included. With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different component properties. All available system components are located in the component catalog, which can be opened using Ctrl+F or by clicking the binocular icon on the component toolbar.

When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and create the connection. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually creates. Help: Detailing > Getting started > Using components > Creating components Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Component concepts Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Picking order Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Up direction

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

Check clashing of structures

In lesson 1 we created a model of a small industrial structure. To complete the model we will need to connect the parts. Before creating the connections usually all of the members in the model collide with other members. By using the Clash check command we can check which parts in the model collide. We will run a clash check now and then again after the connections components have been applied. Help: Modeling > Settings and Tools > Querying objects > Clash check
Check clashing

1. 2.

Select all of the parts of the model by dragging an area select around the whole model. Right-click and select Clash check.

Tekla Structures highlights the colliding parts in yellow and displays the clash check log in the List dialog box. You can see that all the parts in the model collide.

3.

Select any clashing parts on the list and Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

2.2 Create System Components

Next we will create connection components to beam-to-beam and beam-to-column situations. The connections will automatically fit the concrete members.

Use of components: Click once on the component icon to activate the command. Double-click on the component icon to activate the command and open the component dialog. Note: if you click again on an already active command, the command will be deactivated.

Fitting concrete members

The beams between gridlines 1 and 4 at elevation +13400 will be in-situ concrete beams. In lesson 3 we will create a cast unit out of the beams, but first we will need to fit the beams and columns. We will use the battering component. 1. Open the component catalog by clicking on the binocular icon or by typing Ctrl+F.

2. 3.

To see pictures of the connection, check that the Thumbnails icon is active, see below. Type "battering" into the upper field and click on the Search button.

Set the connection parameters

1.

Double-click on the Battering connection (13) icon to activate the command and open the dialog.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

2.

Change the distance to 380 as shown on the dialog below.

3.
Extend beams

Click Apply to take the component setting in to use (the dialog is left open). Pick the column and then a beam at grid intersection A-1 to extend the beam.

4.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

5. 6.

Repeat for grid intersections A-4, B-1, B-2, B-3 and B-4. Leave the command running.

Change the connection parameters

1.

Select standard from the drop-down menu at the top of the dialog and click Load (the clearance value field is cleared).

2.
Shorten all the other beams

Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog. Pick the extended beam at the grid intersection A-1 and then the other beam. The secondary beam is fit according to the primary beam.

3.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

4.

Repeat the procedure for all those beam-to-beam situations in the model where beams clash with each other.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

Shorten the columns

Next cut the column on grid A-4 in the same way: 1. 2. Pick beam. Pick column.

3.

Repeat to all the columns on gridlines 1 to 4. (Note! If you are working on level +13400 and the view depth is 500, you may not see the cut columns, but they are visible in other views.) Interrupt the command.

4.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

Create corbel connection

We will use the Corbel connection (14) to create corbels to columns on gridlines 4 to 7 at elevations +3850 and +7350. The corbel is automatically added to the same cast unit as the column. This connection will cut the beam and add a bearing pad and a reinforcing bar according to the connection settings. For more information on the corbel connection click the Help icon on the connection dialog. 1. Click Ctrl+F and find Corbel connection (14).

2.
Set the connection parameters

Double-click on the connection icon to open the connection dialog. Change the component settings according to the dialog below.

3.

4.
Create the connection

Accept the settings by clicking OK. At grid A-4, elevation +3850, pick the column and then the beam.

5.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

6.

Interrupt the command.

Check connection
To make it easier to check the connection you created, you can create views from different sides of a selected connection. In the view the work area is closely fitted around the connection.
Create connection basic views Select connection

1. 2. 3.

Select the component. Right mouse click. Select Create view > Component basic views.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

10

4.

Keep the connection front view open and close the other connection basic views.

Check dimensions

We will now check that the corbel dimensions are as we defined on the connection dialog. Help: Modeling > Settings and Tools > Querying objects > Measure

1.

Click Create x measure.

2. 3.

Pick two points at the edges of the corbel. Pick a third point to define the dimension line location.

4.

Check also the y dimensions.

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

11

Check cast unit

We will now check the cast unit. Help: Modeling > Parts > Cast units and assemblies 1. Press down ALT and then pick column. The corbel will also be highlighted.

The corbel and the other connection objects are automatically added to the column cast unit.

Create the rest of the corbel connections

1. 2.

Reactivate the Corbel connection (14) command. Repeat the creation procedure to all the other column-beam situations on gridlines 4 to 7 at elevations +3850 and +7350.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

12

Create dowel connection

Next we will create dowel connections in the beam-to-column situations on gridlines 5 to 7 at elevation +13400. We will use the Seating with dowel (75) connection. This connection automatically fits the column according to the beam. It also creates the necessary cuts to the beam, adds a bearing pad and the dowel according to the connection settings. For more information on the Dowel connection click on the Help icon on the connection dialog. 1. Click Ctrl+F and find Dowel connection (75).

2.
Create the connection

Use the default settings (click the connection only once). Pick the column and the beam on grid B-7, elevation +13400.

3.

5.

Repeat in all the beam-to-column situations on gridlines 5 to 7 at elevation +13400.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

13

Create cuts to hollow-core slab corners

We will next fit the hollow-core slab corners to the columns. For this we'll use the grating penetration component. 1. 2.
Set the connection parameters

Find Grating penetration component (92) in the component catalog. Double-click on the icon to open the properties dialog. Set the Penetration type to Rectangular and the clearance around the column to 20 mm.

3.

4.
Create the connection

Close the dialog with OK. At grid A-4, elevation +3850, pick the hollow-core slab. Pick the column.

5. 6.

7.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all other hollow-core slab corners that collide with columns.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

14

2.3 Create Rebars Using System Components

Once you have created and detailed a model of concrete parts, you may need to reinforce the parts. Reinforcing macros create the entire reinforcement of a part in one go. The reinforcement is created according to the component attributes. Reinforcement created using a component is updated automatically if the dimensions of the reinforced concrete part change. See more about reinforcements in Tekla Structures help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Getting started with reinforcement and in help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Basic reinforcement properties.

Reinforcing pad footings

We will first put reinforcements into the 1800*1800 pad footings, which are 650 mm high. For this we use the Pad footing reinforcing macro. For more information click the Help icon in the component dialog.
Define component parameters

1. 2. 3.

Find the Pad footing (77) component in the component catalog. Double-click on the component to define the properties to be used. Check the cover thicknesses on the Picture tab page:

4.

Next define primary bars as described below. Select the grade and size from the Select reinforcing bar dialog, which opens when you push the button in the size field. Exit the dialog with OK.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

15

5. 6.

Use the same settings for the secondary bars and put 12 mm reinforcement in 200 mm intervals. Then you need to set the lacer bars as described below.

7. 8.
Create reinforcements

Save the values in the Save as field with the name 1800*1800-650. Close the dialog with OK. Now pick the Pad footing at A-1 sized 1800*1800*650. The macro generates the reinforcement inside the pad footing.

9.

10. Repeat to all the other 1800*1800*650 sized pad footings.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

16

You can create reinforcements components to multiple parts by using area select, e.g. activate component, area select all pad footings on grid line A. Note, if you already have reinforcement created e.g. A&1 and you area select it together with the others, second set of reinforcements will be created.

For pad footings on gridline B we will use the Pilecap reinforcement component, which creates reinforcement also to the top of the footing. For more information click the help in the component dialog.
Define component parameters

1. 2. 3.

Find the Pilecap reinforcement (76) component in the component catalog. Double-click on the reinforcing component to define the properties to be used. Check the cover thicknesses on the Picture tab page:

4.

Next define top primary and secondary bars as described below. Select the grade and the size in the Select reinforcing bar dialog, which opens when you click on the button [] in the size field. Exit the dialog with OK. With these settings, top bars will be created only under columns 150% of the column size.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

17

5.

Now define bottom bars for primary and secondary directions using 16 mm bars in 150 mm spacing, bend length on both sides is 700 mm. The bottom bars don't need to suit the piles, so you can use the default in that field and leave the % fields empty. Then set 10 mm diameter lacer bars at 200 mm intervals starting at 100 and ending at 700 mm. Save the values in the Save as field with the name 2700*2700-850. Close the dialog with OK. Now pick first the Pad footing sized 2700*2700*850 at B-1, then the column on top of the footing. End with clicking the middle mouse button. The macro generates the reinforcement inside the pad footing and concentrates top bars under the column.

6. 7. 8.
Create reinforcements

9.

10. Repeat step 9 for all pad footings on gridline B.

Reinforcing columns

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

18

We will now create reinforcements into columns using the Rectangular column reinforcement component. See more information by clicking the Help icon in the component dialog.
Define component parameters to be used on gridlines 5 to 7

1. 2. 3.

Find Rectangular column reinforcement (83) in the component catalog. Double-click on the component to define the properties to be used. Turn on side bars, and define cover thickness and rebar diameters as described below:

4.

Set the top bars so that they hold the dowel as shown below:

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

19

5.

And the bottom bars as shown below:

6.
Create reinforcements

Press OK to close the dialog. Pick the column on grid intersection A-7, and the component generates reinforcements inside the column.

7.

8.

Pick, one by one, all the columns on gridlines A and B between gridlines 5 and 7. . (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 17)

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

20

We will now change the component settings to be used on the columns between gridlines 1 and 4.

Define component parameters to be used on gridlines 1 to 4

1. 2.

Double-click on the component in the component catalog again. Change the main rebars to come out from the top of the column (into the in-situ beams) as shown below.

3.

Turn off the top rebars.

4.
Create reinforcements

Click OK to lock the settings and close the dialog. Pick the column at A-1, and the component creates reinforcements as defined.

5.

6.

Pick, one by one, all the columns on gridlines A and B between gridlines 1 and 4. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 17)

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

21

We will next reinforce the column corbels using the Corbel reinforcement (81) component. See more information by clicking the Help icon in the component dialog. 1. 2.
Create reinforcements

Find the Corbel reinforcement (81) in the catalog. Click the component icon once to active the command. Pick first the column, then the corbel and end the selection with the middle mouse button. The component generates reinforcements inside the corbel and the column.

3.

4.

Create corbel reinforcement for all the corbels.

To see connections, such as a corbel connection, in shaded wire frame, use the shortcut Shift+2.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

22

You can create the corbel reinforcement in a two-sided situation by picking first the column, then both the corbels and then end the selection with the middle mouse button.

Two components don't interact together - depending on the settings, it is possible that reinforcements collide. Check collisions with clash check option. Remember to use object in components select switch, see page 27.

Reinforcing beams
We will next create reinforcements into beams using two reinforcing components. See more information by clicking the Help icon in the component dialog.

We will first create main bars and stirrups. 1. 2.

Create reinforcements

Find Beam reinforcement (63) in the catalog. We are going to use the default settings. Click on the reinforcing component once to activate the command. Pick the beam at gridline 7 at elevation +3850. The component generates reinforcements inside the beam and cuts the bottom bars at the corbels.

3.

4.

Pick, one by one, all the precast concrete beams between gridlines 4 and 7. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 16)

We will continue reinforcing the beams by inserting additional rebars at the beam ends. This we will do with the Beam end reinforcement (79) component. See more information by clicking the Help icon in the component dialog. 1. 2. 3. Find the Beam end reinforcement (79). We are going to use the default settings. Click on the reinforcing component once to activate the command. Pick a position at the end of a beam. (Note: this point can be any corner at the end of the beam)

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

23

Create reinforcement

4.

Pick the beam, and the component generates reinforcements inside the beam.

5.

Repeat the picking for each end of all precast concrete beams between gridlines 4 and 7 at elevations +3850 and +7350.

Next we will create the beam end reinforcement for a beam at elevation +13400.
Create reinforcement

1.

Using the same settings, create the beam end reinforcement at grid intersection A-7 at +13400.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

24

As shown above, the reinforcements come through the cut at the top of the beam. So we need to change the parameters and modify the connection.

2.

Open view GRID 7 to see the situation better.

3.

Double-click on the component to open the component dialog.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

25

In the dialog, study the area marked with a red frame above. The problem rebars are defined as 5A.
Change connection parameters

4.

Go to the Groups tab and change the distance between the rebars to 30.00 210.00 40.00 as shown below.

Modify the connection

5.

Click Modify.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

26

The connection is modified and the rebars are arranged according to the new settings.

6.
Create reinforcements

Click Apply to use the new settings. Create the beam end reinforcements to all the other beams at elevation +13400.

7.

When trying to select the component it is important to understand the Select component and Select objects in component icons in the Select toolbar:

When the Select component icon is active you can only select the component, not the objects created by the component. You can open the component dialog by double-clicking on any component object.

When the Select objects in components icon is active you can select objects inside the component: parts, bolts, reinforcements, etc. If you need to modify the component you need to double-click on the component symbol.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

27

Reinforcing slabs
We will next create reinforcement mesh into the slabs at elevations +3850 and +7350 using the Slab bars (18) reinforcing component. See more information by clicking the Help icon in the component dialog. 1. 2.
Define component parameters

Find Slab bars (18) in the catalog. Double-click on the component to define the properties to be used. Define the cover thickness to be used.

3.

4.

Open the Bottom bars tab page and set the bar diameter to 10 mm, and spacing in both directions to 200 mm. Change also the bar generation type to mesh.

5. 6.
Create mesh

Use the same settings for top bars. Close the dialog with OK. Pick the cast in-situ slab between gridlines 5 and 6 at level +3850. The macro generates reinforcements inside the slabs.

7.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

28

8.

Create reinforcements to the in-situ slab at level +7350.

Lifting hooks
We will next create lifting anchors into beams and columns using the Lifting anchor (80) macro. The macro generates lifting anchors according to center of gravity. See more information by clicking the Help icon in the component dialog. 1. 2.
Define component parameters

Find Lifting anchor (80) in the component catalog. Double-click on the component to define the properties to be used. Select anchor shape and define anchor dimensions. Select anchor size and grade. Change also side and class.

3. 4. 5.

6.

Click Apply to lock the settings.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

29

Create lifting anchor

7.

Pick the column at grid intersection A-1. The macro generates lifting anchors inside the column.

8.

Pick, one by one, all the columns on gridline A. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 16)

The corbels are on the other side of the columns on gridline B so we need to modify the lifting anchors to appear on the other side of the column.
Change component parameters

1.

Change the side to Top.

2.
Create lifting anchor

Click OK to lock the settings and close the dialog. Pick, one by one, all the columns on gridline B. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 16)

3.

Still using the Lifting anchor (80) component, we are going to create lifting anchors to all the pre-cast concrete beams. 1.
Change component parameters

Double-click on the component again. Change the anchor shape and dimensions and apply.

2.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

30

Create lifting anchor

3.

Pick the beam on gridline 7 at elevation +3850. The macro generates a lifting anchor inside the beam.

4.

One by one, pick all the pre-cast concrete beams. (Note: you can also use area select as explained on page 16)

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

31

2.4 Modify All the Corbel Connections

Next we are going to modify the corbel connections. 1. 2. Double-click on the corbel connection on A-7 at elevation +3850 to open the connection dialog. Select and load the standard settings.

3.

Click Modify.

As you can see, the reinforcement inside the corbel and the beam will be modified according to the changed corbel size.

Modify all the corbel connections at once

We can easily modify only connections of the same type shown in the connection dialog by selecting Ignore other types in the connection dialog box. Help: Detailing > Getting started > Using components > Modifying components 1. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box.

2. Select all the connections in the model by using the Select connection select switch shown below and dragging a window around the whole model.

3. Click Modify.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING System Components for Precast Concrete

32

System Components for Steel

Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 21, 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Creating System Components for Steel ....................................................................3

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 About System Components.......................................................................................................3 Column Base Plates ..................................................................................................................5 Beam to Beam Web ..................................................................................................................8 Beam to Column Web .............................................................................................................11 Beam to Column Flange..........................................................................................................16 Create AutoDefaults Rules ......................................................................................................18 Use AutoDefaults Rules ..........................................................................................................25

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents

ii

Creating System Components for Steel

In this lesson

This lesson introduces the basics of creating system connections in Tekla Structures. You will learn how to: Create connections Work with connection properties Save the properties for later use Work with AutoDefaults, i.e. create rules to apply pre-defined connection properties automatically

2.1 About System Components

You can model connections quickly with the Tekla Structures system components. The greatest benefits of using system components are: The connection properties can be saved with a particular name so that they can be used later. These properties can then be used for all projects. When you modify a main objects profile in the model all of the connections to the object are automatically modified at the same time. If you select options such as edit, copy, or mirror, all connections are automatically included. The connections that are copied or mirrored are exactly the same as the originals. The same applies to plates and bolts. With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connection properties. All available system components are located in the component catalog, which can be opened using Ctrl+F or by clicking the binocular icon on the component toolbar.

When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties and create the connection. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quicker than trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actually creates. Help: Detailing > Getting started > Using components > Creating components Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Component concepts
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Picking order Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Up direction

Check clashing of steel structures

In Chapter 1 we created a model of a small industrial structure. To complete the model we will need to connect the parts. Before creating the connections usually all of the members in the model collide with other members. By using the Clash check command we can check which parts in the model collide. We will run a clash check now and then again after the connections have been applied. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Querying objects > Clash check
Check clashing

1. 2.

Select all of the parts of the model by dragging an area select around the whole model. Right-click and select Clash check.

Tekla Structures highlights the colliding parts in yellow and displays the clash check log in the List dialog box. You can see that all of the parts in the model collide.

Select any clashing parts from the list and Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

2.2 Column Base Plates

The first system connections that we will add are the column base plate details. First we will create a base plate using the default values. We will then modify the properties of the base plate and finally create the rest of the base plates with the new properties.
Create base plate to one column

1.

Open the component catalog by clicking on the binocular icon or by typing Ctrl+F.

2. 3.

To see pictures of the connection, check that the Thumbnails icon is active, see below. Type "base plate" into the upper field and click on the Search button. In the Component catalog, double-click on the Base plate (1004) icon.

4.

The following dialog appears:

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

5. 6. 7.

Click OK to accept the default values. Pick any column. When prompted, pick the bottom endpoint of the column as the position and the base plate will be created.

8.

Use the shortcut Ctrl+2 to set the parts displayed in shaded wire frame.

You can see that the anchor bolts were created just as ordinary bolts.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

Add anchor rods to base plates

We will change the bolts in the base plate to anchor rods by modifying the connection properties. 1. 2. 3. Double-click on the green connection symbol, and the Base plate dialog box will reopen. Select the Anchor rods tab page in the dialog box. Edit the values in the fields shown highlighted in the figure below.

4. 5.

Click Modify and the bolts become anchor bars. Click OK to accept the properties for use later.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

Create base plates to rest of the columns

1.

Press the Enter key to start the base plate command again. To repeat the last command, do one of the following: Click Edit -> Repeat last command Press Enter

2.

Create the rest of the base plates by picking each column and then the position for the base plate.

2.3 Beam to Beam Web

Shear plates
We will use the Shear plate simple (146) connection to make the beam to beam web connections. The shear plate will be welded to the primary beam web and bolted to the secondary beam web. We will use the connection both when the secondary beam is perpendicular to the main member or at a skewed angle to the main member.
Create one shear plate connection

1.

Open the component dialog (Ctrl+F or binocular icon), find the Shear plate simple (146) connection, and double-click on its icon.

The following dialog appears:

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

2. 3.

Pick the beam on gridline 1 as the main part of the connection. Pick the beam perpendicular to the main part to be the secondary part and the connection will be created.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

Check the connection

To make it easier to check the connection you created you can create views from different sides of a selected connection. In the view the work area is closely fitted around the connection.
Create connection basic views

To create component basic views: 1. 2. Select the connection symbol. Right-click and select Create view > Component basic views, and four basic views (front, top end and perspective) appear.

3.
Check bolt dimensions

Keep the Component front view open and close the other component basic views.

We will now check the bolt location distances and bolt edge distances between bolts and the shear plate. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Querying objects > Measure 1. 2. 3. Click Tools > Measure > Bolt measure. Pick the bolt group. Pick the shear plate and the temporary dimensions are shown in the view.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

10

Now we will accept the created connection with the default properties.
Create the rest of the shear plates

With the connections applied properties, create shear plate connections to all the other beam to beam conditions.

2.4 Beam to Column Web

We will use the End plate (144) connection to make the beam to column web connections. For the double sided beam to column web connections we will use the Two sided end plate (142) connection. That connection uses only one bolt group to go through all three parts. We will then make the wall brace to column connections with Tube gusset (20). The connection uses a gusset plate to connect the beam to the column. Connection plates welded to the end of the braces will be bolted to the gusset plate.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

11

End plate
We will now use the End plate (144) connection to make all beam to column web connections using the default connection properties. We will modify the properties later with AutoDefaults.
Create end plates

1.

In the component catalog, find the End plate (144) connection.

2.

Make an end plate connection at every beam to column web condition where there is only one secondary beam coming to the column web. The column is the main part in the connection, so when prompted, pick the column as the main part.

Two-sided end plate

Create the two sided end plate connection to all double sided beam to column web conditions to connect beams to both sides of the column web:
Create two-sided end plates

1.

Find the Two sided end plate (142) connection.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

12

2. 3. 4.

When prompted, pick the column as the main part. Pick each beam as a secondary part. Click the middle mouse button to complete the connection. When there are multiple secondaries you need to click the middle mouse button to complete the selection. Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics > Picking order

Wall bracing tube gusset

We will connect all the wall braces to columns using Tube gusset (20) connections and after that modify their properties all at once.
Create tube gusset to intersection of braces

1.

Find the Tube gusset (20) connection.

2. 3. 4.

Pick the column on grid intersection A-3 as the main part. Pick the four braces, one by one, as secondaries. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

Now we can see that the connection created has only one gusset plate which goes through the column. We could also have created a separate gusset plate at each side of the column by creating two separate connections.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

13

Create the rest of the tube gussets

While still in the command, create the connections to the other ends of the braces by doing the following: 1. 2. 3. Pick the column. Pick the brace. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

Modify the connection

Edit the number of bolt rows

1.

On the Bracebolts1, Bracebolts2 and Bracebolts3 tab pages, edit the number of horizontal and vertical bolt rows as shown in the figures below.

2.

Click Modify and then Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

14

The Bracebolts1 tab affects the first picked brace, Bracebolts2 tab the second pick and Bracebolts3 picks 3-9.

Check the changes

Check that the number of bolt rows was changed and that the clearance is correct. To check the clearance: 1. Click the Create X measure icon.

2.

Pick the starting and end points as shown:

3. 4.

Pick a point to locate the dimension. Repeat for the other dimensions you want to check.

Now we will also modify the other tube gusset connections with the new properties we applied.
Modify all the tube gusset connections at once

We can easily modify only connections of the same type shown in the connection dialog by selecting Ignore other types in the connection dialog box. 1. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box. Help: Modifying connections
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

15

2.

Select all the connections in the model by using the Select connections select switch shown below and dragging a window around the whole model.

3.

Click Modify.

We will now save the edited properties for later use. By saving the properties with a descriptive name you can easily use them later. You can also get AutoDefaults to automatically use the saved properties in desired cases by setting up AutoDefaults rules.

Save the properties

4. 5.

Type Wall bracings in the Save as field in the dialog box. Click the Save as button.

2.5 Beam to Column Flange

We will now create End plate (144) connections to all the beam to column flange conditions by using the default properties. Then we will edit one of the connections properties. Instead of modifying the rest of the connections with the new properties, in the next section, we will create AutoDefaults rules to define when certain properties will be used.

End plate
Create end plates

1.

Find the End plate (144) connection.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

16

2.

Create connections at all the beam to column flange framing conditions.

Change the number of bolt rows and save the properties

We will now change the number of bolt rows to eight when the secondary beam is IPE600. We will then save the new properties with a specific name so that we will be able to use them in AutoDefaults. We will also save properties with seven bolt rows for later use with IPE500 beams.
8 bolt rows to IPE600

1. 2.

Double-click one of the connections we just created to open the connection dialog box. On the Bolts tab input 8 as the number of bolt rows.

3.

Click Modify.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

17

4.

Type 8_bolt_rows in the Save as field in the dialog box and click Save as.

7 bolt rows to IPE500

5. 6.

On the Bolts page input 7 as the number of bolt rows. Use Save as to save the properties as 7_bolt_rows.

2.6 Create AutoDefaults Rules

With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different pre-defined connection properties. When the connections need to be modified (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using AutoDefaults rules defined by you.

New rule group: Industrial building rules

We will now create a new AutoDefaults rule group named Industrial building rules. This rule group could include all the rules needed to define when to use certain pre-defined connection properties for the entire project. Help: System > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults setup > AutoDefaults setup We will first select connection parameters to be always used for Tube gusset (20) connection. We will then define two simple rules for the End plate (144) connection. 1. 2. When the secondary is an IPE500, the end plate connection will have 7 bolt rows. When secondary is an IPE600, the end plate connection will have 8 bolt rows.

When the secondary is neither of the above (IPE500 or IPE600) the default rule will be met and the standard properties will be used.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

18

Create new rule group: Industrial building rules

1. 2.

Click Setup > AutoDefaults to open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box. Right-click in the dialog and select New rule group, and a rule group named New appears.

3.

Select the New rule group, press the F2 key and type: Industrial building rules.

Select connection parameters for tube gusset (20)

1. 2.

Browse to Industrial building rules > Components 4 > Tube gusset (20). Select the standard.j120 parameters, right-click and pick Select connection
parameters

3.

Select the Wall bracings and click OK

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

19

The Tube gusset (20) connection will now use Wall bracing parameters in all cases

Create new rule sets for end plate

1. 2.

Browse to Industrial building rules > Components 1 > End plate (144). Right-click the connection Endplate (144) and select Create additional rule sets.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

20

3.

Two rule sets: New and Default appear in the tree. By default, both rule sets have standard connection properties selected.

IPE 600 rule set

Add rule to rule set New

1.

Right-click the rule set New and select Edit rule set... to open the AutoDefault Rules dialog box.

2. 3.
Enter name for rule set

Select the rule Secondary 1 profile from the Available rules list. Click the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list of rules in the rule set. In the right pane under Exact value, fill in IPE600. Enter a name for the rule set: Secondary IPE600. Click OK.

4. 5. 6.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

21

We have used the End plate (144) connection both in beam to column web and beam to column flange cases so the rule will now be used in both cases. We could make this rule to work only in beam to beam flange cases by setting another rule: Secondary beam to beam flange TRUE.

Select connection parameters

7.

Select the standard.j144 parameters, right-click and pick Select connection

parameters

8. 9.

This opens Attribute file list in which all the saved properties for connection 144 are listed. Select the 8_bolt_rows properties and click OK.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

22

IPE 500 rule set

We will now create another rule set for IPE500 taking advantage of the IPE600 rule set we just created.
Copy and modify rule set

1. 2.

Select the rules set Secondary IPE600, right-click and select Copy rule set. While the rule set Secondary IPE600 is still selected, right-click again and select Paste rule set.

We now have two identical rule sets.

3. 4.

Select the upper Secondary IPE600 rule set, right-click and select Edit rule set Modify the value in the rule to IPE500 and the Rule set name to Secondary IPE500 and click OK.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

23

5. 6.

Select the properties 8_bolt_rows under the rule set Secondary IPE500, right-click and pick Select connection parameters Select the parameters: 7_bolt_rows and click OK.

7.

Finally click OK in the AutoDefaults setup dialog box.

Now the new AutoDefaults rules are ready for use.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

24

2.7 Use AutoDefaults Rules

We will now use the Industrial building rules created to automatically apply the correct properties to the existing End plate (144) connections.

Switch the AutoDefaults on in the end plate connections

1. 2. 3. 4. Open the End plate (144) connection dialog box. On the General tab select Industrial building rules. Click the on/off button and tick only the Rule Group check box. Check that the Ignore other types is selected.

5. 6. 7.

Save as ipe600. Select all of the connections in the model. Click Modify.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

25

Since all the secondaries in our end plate connection are IPE600, they all pass the Secondary IPE 600 rule and result in having the same properties, 8_bolt_rows.

Change profiles AutoDefaults react

Lets now assume that first and second floor beams on gridlines 4 and 7 don't have as much load as others and we can change their profiles to IPE500.
Change the profiles

1. 2.

Double-click one of the beams selected in the figure below to open the beam properties dialog box. Change the profile to IPE500 and tick only the profile check box.

3.

Select the four beams shown highlighted in the figure below and click Modify.

You can see that the connections in the modified beams were updated to have 7 rows of bolts.

Inquire the properties used

1. 2.

Select one of the connection symbols of the changed profiles. Right-click and select Inquire.

From the inquire object dialog box you can check which rule group, particular rule and connection attributes were used.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

26

Check clashing again

Now that we have connected all the steel parts in our model we will run the clash check again.
Check clashing

1. 2.

Select all of the parts by dragging an area select around the whole model. Right-click and select Clash check.

To quickly locate and view colliding parts in the model, select a line containing the ID numbers of colliding parts from the list. Tekla Structures highlights the parts in the model.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Creating System Components for Steel

27

Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 19, 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents ................................................................................................................................. i

Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing...................................................................... 3

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 Create a Cast Unit .....................................................................................................................3 Create a Brace Connection from Scratch ..................................................................................7 Create a Brace Connection with a Custom Part ......................................................................19 Create a Column Shoe and an Anchor Bolt Connection..........................................................23 Create Interactive Reinforcements ..........................................................................................31 Create Cuts Interactively .........................................................................................................42

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

ii

Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

In this lesson

Tekla Structures covers a great variety of the connection and reinforcement components used in most projects. However, you may come across situations where it's not possible to make the necessary detail in your model using the system components. In this lesson we will practice interactive detailing. We will create interactive reinforcements, cast units, embeds, column shoe connections and cuts.

3.1 Create a Cast Unit

As we learned in lesson 2, the corbel connection component automatically included the corbel in the column cast unit. However, often cast units need to be created interactively. You might need to create a complicated concrete shape out of many separate parts and then merge them into one cast unit. For more information on cast units see help file: Help: Modeling > Parts > Cast units and assemblies > Working with cast units

Clean model views

1. 2. 3.

Double-click on the background of the 3D view to open view properties. Click Display. Turn off points, reinforcements, cuts, fittings and component symbols.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

4. 5.

Click Modify. Click OK on View properties dialog.

Select in-situ beams

1.

Turn on the part select switch.

2.

Click select filter.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

3.

Use part name to filter beams only.

4.

Click OK to accept the settings. Tekla Structures has also pre-defined select filters, which you can find from the drop down menu next to select filter icon e.g. "BEAM_CONCRETE" filters according to BEAM name and CONCRETE material. You can easily create more pre-defined select filters, just do save as on select filter dialog.

5. 6.

Rotate the 3D view so that it is easy to select the in-situ beams. Window-select the beams.

Create cast unit

7.

Right-click, select Cast unit > Create cast unit.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

The cast unit is colored cyan. The main part of the cast unit is colored magenta. The main part can be changed by selecting any part, right-click, select Set as new main part of assembly.

Turn off select switches

8. 9.

Click on the arrow on the select toolbar to view the drop-down menu. Select standard on the select filter drop-down menu to load the standard values.

Remember that you can always check the cast unit by holding down the Alt key and selecting a part. Alt + Select

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

3.2 Create a Brace Connection from Scratch

We are going to create a fastening plate by creating all the separate parts and welding them into an assembly. This embed plate is then added to a cast unit. Braces are fitted and sitewelded to the fastening plate to finalize the connection. 1. 2. Open the view GI D A. R Pick a work area around the brace connection at gridline 3.

Create steel plate

Define plate parameters

1. 2.

Double-click on the Create beam icon to open the beam properties dialog. Apply the properties for the fastening plate as shown in the dialog box below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

Locate start position

3.

Hold down the Ctrl key and pick a reference point from the middle of the braces.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

4.

While still holding down the Ctrl key, pick another reference point from the edge of the column.

5.

Right mouse click and select snap override Near.

6.

Let the cursor snap (do not pick) to the edge of the column below the previous point.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

7.

Type 450 (the Enter a numeric location dialog will open automatically)

8.
Locate end position

Press Enter. Right mouse click and select snap override Near again.

9.

10. Let the cursor snap (do not pick) to the edge of the column above the previous point.

11. Type 900. 12. Press Enter.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

10

The plate will appear in the correct location. 13. Interrupt.

Create stud
Next we will create steel parts for studs. We will create one completed stud with welds, and then move and copy it to the correct locations.

Create the body of the stud

14. Change the beam properties of the studs as shown in the dialog box below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

11

15. Click Apply (leaving the dialog open).

In plane view (2D), the picking of start/end points is always to view plane in depth wise (in this situation to grid A). So in order to place the stud in correct position we need define starting point 50mm into the view. We can do this with reference point
Define start and end positions

16. Hold down the Ctrl and pick a reference point at the bottom inner corner of the plate. 17. Type 0, 50, 50 (direction x, y, z). 18. Press Enter 19. Type 100, 0, 0. (this creates end point 100mm in x direction) 20. Press Enter

The body of the stud is created.

Create the head of the stud Define start and end positions

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Change the profile to D30. Click OK. Turn the view to 3D with Ctrl+P Pick starting point at the end of the stud. Type 15, 0, 0. (this creates end point 15mm in x direction) Click Enter. Interrupt the command.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

12

The parts of the stud are created.

Create welds
Next we are going to weld the stud head to the stud body. The stud is then welded to the plate. This will create an embed assembly. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Weld
Define weld parameters

1.

Double-click on the Create weld icon.

2.

Apply the settings as shown below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

13

3.
Pick parts to be welded

Click OK. Pick the body of the stud (the primary part for the first weld). Pick the head of the stud (the secondary part for the first weld). Pick the plate (the primary part for the second weld). Pick the body of the stud (the secondary part for the second weld).

4. 5. 6. 7.

It is very important to enter the welding order correctly. Tekla Structures uses the welding order to determine the primary and secondary parts of the assembly. This affects the position of the parts in the drawings.

Inquire assembly

You can check assemblies using the command Inquire Assembly. 1. 2. Pick the plate (or any part of the assembly). Right-click and select Inquire > Assembly.

The main part of the assembly will appear red and other parts will appear yellow.

To select the entire assembly: press the Alt key while clicking on a part in the assembly.

Copy studs
Next we will copy the stud to the correct locations to complete the embed.
Select part to be copied

1.

Select the stud and welds with a window from left to right

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

14

Copy

2. 3. 4.

Right-click and select Copy special > Translate -100 mm in y direction. Click Copy. Interrupt.

Select parts to be copied and copy

5. 6.

Select both studs and welds with a window from left to right (exactly like in step 1). Right-click, select Copy special > Translate 4 times 200 mm in z direction.

7. 8. 9.

Click Copy. Interrupt. Check the assembly.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

15

Adding embed to cast unit

Next we will add the embed to the cast unit. For more information on cast units see help file: Help: Modeling > Parts > Cast units and assemblies > Working with cast units

10. Turn on the select assemblies switch.

11. Pick the embed (all the parts of embed are highlighted). 12. Right-click, select Assembly > Add as sub-assembly. 13. Pick the column.

The embed has been added to the column cast unit.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

16

Create fitting
We will use the Fitting command to trim the braces at the embed. The Fitting tool will trim the end of the part on a plane perpendicular to the view plane, which is defined by picking 2 points on a line. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Fine-tuning part shape > Fitting 1. Click the Create fitting icon.

2.
Define cut line

Window-select the braces to be fitted. Pick the points on the plate corners to set the cutting line for the fitting.

3.

Define the fitting line with two points.

The selected parts have been fitted.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

17

Creating site welds

To finalize the connection we will create a site weld between the brace and the embed. The site weld will not create an assembly, but the weld can be called automatically into drawings. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Weld
Define weld parameters

1. 2.

Double-click on the Create weld icon. Apply the settings as shown below.

Pick parts to be welded

3. 4. 5.

Pick the first brace. Pick the plate. Repeat for the other brace.

The connection has been finalized. In lesson 4 we will create a custom component out of the embed and the connection.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

18

3.3 Create a Brace Connection with a Custom Part

Next we will create a similar connection at the bottom end of the brace on gridline 2, but this time we will use a predefined custom component embed. In lesson 4 we will cover creation and use of custom components in more detail. For more information on cast units, see help file: help: Detailing > Custom components
Importing custom components

1. 2. 3.

Open the component catalog. Right-click, select Import. Select the fastener plate file (in Finland: SBK-K LL -J L -PK fastening plates.uel) P L

Note! You need to have predefined custom components files downloaded in order to complete this task!

4.

Search SBKL on Component catalog menu.

5.
Define custom part parameters

Double-click on the SBKL component. Select and load the SBKL200x300 settings.

6.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

19

7.

Click OK.

Insert custom part

1.

At the bottom of the column at grid intersection A2, pick the insertion point at the intersection of the column edge and the brace center line (use fully rendered view Ctrl+4). Pick a point below the insertion point to show the direction of the component.

2.

Change the transparency with Ctrl+2 to see the inserted component.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

20

Next we will add the embed to the cast unit just like before. Note: component itself can't be added to the cast unit, so we need to select the objects inside the component.
Select parts

3.

Activate the Select assemblies icon on the select toolbar.

4.
Add parts to cast unit

Pick the custom component (all the parts of the embed are highlighted). Right-click, select Assembly > Add as sub-assembly. Pick the column.

5. 6.

To finalize this connection we will fit the brace and site-weld it to the plate just like we did earlier when we created a brace connection from scratch.
Fit the brace

1. 2. 3.

Click the Create fitting icon. Select the brace to be fitted. Pick the points on the plate corners to set the cut line for the fitting.

Site weld

1. 2. 3.

Activate the Create weld icon (previous site-weld settings are still applied). Pick the brace. Pick the plate.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

21

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

22

3.4 Create a Column Shoe and an Anchor Bolt Connection

Next we will create a connection which will make column shoes and anchor bolts, and cut the column according to the column shoes. We will use predefined custom parts for the column shoes and anchor bolts. In lesson 4 we will cover the creation and use of custom components in more detail. For more information on cast units, see help file: help: Detailing > Custom components 1.
Importing custom components

Open the component catalog. Right-click, select Import. Select the column shoe file (in Finland: HPK -PPK -PEC column shoes.uel). M M Right-click, Import. This time, select anchor bolt file (in Finland: HPM-PPM anchor bolts.uel). Select custom on the drop-down menu to display custom components.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Next we will insert a column shoe and an anchor bolt at the edge of the column at grid A-7. We will first insert the components and then move them to the correct location.
Inserting the components

1. 2.

Click once on the HPKM24 column shoe to activate it. Pick the corner of the column.

3.

Type 0, -1, 0 to define the direction of the component.

4.

Click OK or Enter.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

23

5. 6.

Interrupt. Repeat same steps for anchor bolt HPM24L.

Now we will move the components to the correct location, but first we will have to make sure that we select the whole components, not the parts inside the components.
Move the components to correct location

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Press the Select component icon on the select toolbar. Select the column shoe. Right-click, Move special > Translate. G t he necessary values in the dX and dY fields as shown below. ive Click Move.

6.

Interrupt.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

24

7. 8. 9.

Now select the anchor bolt. Type the necessary dZ80 value into the Move dialog (the dX and dY values are the = same as those of the column shoe). Click Move.

10. Interrupt.

The column shoe and the anchor bolt are now in the correct location.

Next we will create a very small cutting part with the Concrete slab command, which we will use for cutting the column corner according to the column shoe.
Create a cutting part

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Hide the column shoe and the anchor bolt. Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon. Define a 210 mm thick slab. Define the slab position to Front with -10 mm offset. Pick the corner of the column. Let the cursor snap to the other corner of the column (do not pick).

7. 8.

Type 100. Select perpendicular snap override (right-click) and let the cursor snap to the opposite edge of the column.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

25

9.

Type 100.

10. Select perpendicular snap override again and let the cursor snap to the edge of the column according to the picture.

11. Type 100. 12. Click the middle mouse button to close the polygon.

13. Interrupt.

We now need to move the cutting part to the correct position and round the corner. Open the view at elevation +0 to see the needed distance better.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

26

Move the slab

1. 2. 3.

Select cutting part. Right-click, Move special > Translate. Define dX = 7 mm and dY = -7 mm.

4.
Round corner of the slab

Click Move. Double-click on the chamfer at the back corner to open the Chamfer properties dialog. Select the rounded corner option and define the radius as 15 mm. Click Modify.

5. 6. 7.

Next we will copy-rotate the column shoe, anchor bolt and cutting part 3 times to the other corners of the column. Redraw the view to bring back the hidden column shoe and anchor bolt.
Copy rotate

1. 2.

Select the parts. Right-click, Copy special > Rotate.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

27

3. 4.

Pick the grid intersection as the rotation origin. Define the number of copies as 3 and rotation angle as 90.

5.

Click Copy.

The column shoe and the anchor bolts are now at each corner of the column.

Now we need to cut the column according to the cutting part and then delete the parts. (In section 3.6 cut options are explained in more detail.)
Create cuts

1.

Activate the part cut command.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Pick the column. Click on the cutting part. Repeat to all the corners. Delete all the cutting parts.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

28

To finalize the connection we will add the column shoes to the column cast unit and the anchor bolts to the pad footing cast unit.
Select parts

1.

Activate the Select components icon on the select toolbar.

2.
Add parts to cast unit

Hold down Ctrl and pick all four column shoes (all the parts are highlighted). Right-click, Assembly > Add as sub-assembly. Pick the column.

3. 4.

The column shoes have been added to the column cast unit. 5. Repeat to the anchor bolts.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

29

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

30

3.5 Create Interactive Reinforcements

In lesson 2 we created reinforcements with system components. You may need to do some reinforcing interactively to complete reinforcing. Tekla Structures has multiple options for reinforcement creation. In this lesson we will use rebar groups to complete in-situ slab reinforcement at the first floor on gridline A between gridlines 5 and 6. See more about reinforcements in Tekla Structures help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Single bars, bar groups, and meshes > Reinforcing bar and help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Single bars, bar groups, and meshes > Reinforcing bar group

First we will create two rebars tying the in-situ slab together with the hollow-core slabs.
Define rebar parameters

1.

Double-click on the Create reinforcing bar group icon.

2. 3. 4.

Click Select to define the rebar size and grade. The bending radius is defined automatically according to the rebar. Select 10 mm main reinforcement. Click OK on the Select reinforcing bar dialog.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

31

5. 6.

Use the No hook option for both ends. Define the first and last segment leg length as 1000 mm as shown below.

7.

Define a group of 2 with equal distribution on the Group tab page.

8. 9.
Define rebar shape

Close the dialog with OK. Pick the slab at the first floor.

10. Define a U-shaped poly-line as shown below. You can pick the start and end positions at any locations (use near snap override), because the segment length has been defined as 1000 mm.

11. Click the middle mouse button to end defining the rebar shape.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

32

Define rebar group direction

12. Define the group direction with two points as shown below.

The reinforcements are created after the second pick. Next, we will copy-mirror the reinforcements to the other end of the slab. 1. 2. 3. Select the reinforcements. Right-click, Copy special > Mirror. Indicate the mirror line at the middle of the slab with two points.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

33

The reinforcements are mirrored.

Next we are going to create a reinforcing bar group for the other direction.
Create rebar group

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Double-click on the Create reinforcing bar group icon. Click Select to define the rebar size and grade. The bending radius is defined automatically according to the rebar. Select the 10 mm stirrup reinforcement. Click OK on the Select reinforcing bar dialog. Use the 50 mm long 135-degree custom hook with 20mm radius. Define 25 mm cover thickness in the on-plane direction and 25 mm in the from-plane direction.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

34

7. 8.

G to the Group tab page. o Define the group creation method as exact spacing with flexible first and last space. Set intervals to 200 using normal group type.

9.

Close the dialog by clicking OK.

10. Pick the in-situ slab. 11. Now define the rebar shape. This time we need to pick the points at the corners of the slab.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

35

12. Click the middle mouse button to end defining the rebar shape. 13. Next define the group location by picking the start and end positions at the long side corners.

The rebars are created after the second pick.

Clash check

Redraw the window and if necessary turn on reinforcing from the view settings. 1. Click the Select objects in components icon.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

36

2.

Select the reinforcements and the slab.

3.

Right-click, Clash check.

In case of collision, a list will open to indicate the id numbers of the colliding rebars. Select the first row and those colliding rebars will be highlighted in the model. As you can see, the mesh collides with the L rebar and the stirrups also collide also with the L rebar. Open the G ID 5 view and the elevation view +3850. R

Modify stirrups

1. 2. 3.

Double-click on the stirrups. Change the cover thickness of the second segment to 35. Change the From plane distance to 45.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

37

4.

Click Modify.

The U bars cover thicknesses change as shown above. The L shaped bar is still colliding with the mesh and the stirrups so we need to modify it further.
Modify L shaped rebars

1. 2.

Double-click on the L rebar. Change the From plane distance to 45.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

38

3.

Click Modify.

The L bar cover thicknesses change as shown above. Run the clash check again and continue modifications if necessary.

Next we will copy the reinforcements to elevation +7350.

Copy reinforcements to upper elevation

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Delete the slab at elevation +7350. Hold down Alt and select the slab at +3850 (slab and reinforcements will be highlighted). Right-click, Copy special > Translate. Set dZ 3500. = Click Copy.

Next we will create seam reinforcements between hollow-core slabs on the first floor. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Open the view at elevation +3850. Double-click on the Create reinforcing bar group icon. (See settings on the dialog below) Change the name to SEAM_ EBAR. R Click Select to define the rebar size and grade. The bending radius is defined automatically according to the rebar. Select 12 mm main reinforcement. Click OK on the Select reinforcing bar dialog. Change class to 4. Turn off hooks. Define 50 mm cover thickness for the On plane direction and 0 for other directions.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

39

10. Change the rebar group to exact spacing and define 8 spaces. 11. Apply.

12. Pick the hollow-core slab next to the in-situ slab (in plan view, above the in-situ slab). 13. Use the following snap settings: 14. Hold down Ctrl and pick a reference point (1) between the hollow-core slabs close to the corner of the in-situ slab. 15. Type 1200. 16. Let the cursor snap to the right between the slabs. 17. Type 2400.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

40

18. Click the middle mouse button. 19. Show the range to reinforce with two points.

20. Interrupt.

Next we will detach the seam rebars from the hollow-core slab that we picked while creating the rebars. Otherwise, the seam reinforcements would be shown in the cast unit drawing created for that hollow-core slab. 1. 2. Select the seam rebars. Right-click, Detach from part.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

41

3.6 Create Cuts Interactively

You can cut parts by various methods in Tekla Structures. The available cuts are: Line cut Polygon cut Part cut There are numerous places in our model in which the parts are still colliding with each other, and the shape of the parts needs to be modified with the cutting tools. We will use these cutting tools to cut the concrete slabs with the silos (part cut) and then create a penetration for a column (polygon cut) through a hollow-core slab.

Create part cuts for silos

Create part cut

1. 2.

On the View properties dialog, Display, check that cuts are visible. Click on the Create part cut icon.

3. 4. 5.

Pick one of the slabs as the part to be cut. Pick the related silo as the cutting part. Click the middle mouse button. The slab is now cut. A striped antimatter part cut the same size as the silo appears.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

42

Change part cut profile

In order to have clearance between the concrete slab and the silo we will now modify the size of the profile used to make the part cut. 1. Disable all the selection switches except for the Select cuts switch. This will make it easier to select the part cut.

2. 3. 4.

Double-click on the part cut. The Column properties dialog box appears. Uncheck all the modify check boxes and change the profile as shown in the dialog below:

5.

Click Modify.

This creates a 150 mm gap all the way around between the slab and the silo.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

43

The part cut height is still equal to the height of the cutting part (= the silo). Sometimes it is more convenient to work with shorter part cuts. By inquiring the slab (select object, right-click, select Inquire > Part) you can see that the slab bottom level is +13400 and top level +13575.
Change part cut height

Double-click on the part cut to open the Column properties dialog box. On the Position tab page: 1. 2. Change the bottom level to 13000 and top level to 13800. Click Modify.

Now the part cut is just a little thicker than the slab, which is enough.

Copy the part cut to the other silo

3.

Copy it 9000 mm in the x direction to the other silo.

The antimaterial part will automatically adjust to the new situation and cut the other slab.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Precast Concrete Detailing

44

Interactive Steel Detailing

Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 21, 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents..................................................................................................................................i

Interactive Steel Detailing ...........................................................................................3

3.1 3.2 3.3 Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively.......................................................................3 Create an End Plate Connection from Scratch ........................................................................10 Create Cuts Interactively .........................................................................................................24

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents

Interactive Steel Detailing

In this lesson

Tekla Structures system components cover a great variety of the components used in most projects. However, you may come across situations where it's not possible to make the necessary connections in your model using the system components. In this chapter we will take advantage of the Tekla Structures tube gusset connection by using it as a base for a connection. We will explode the system component, modify the ungrouped objects and then add objects to the connection using a system component detail. We will also create a whole new connection (i.e. all connection objects: parts, welds, bolts and cuts) interactively from scratch without using any system components.

3.1 Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively

In Tekla Structures there is no gusset plate system component available in which you can get the stiffeners included in the connection. You can, however, create the stiffeners separately by using a system component detail. We will explode an existing tube gusset connection, modify the gusset plate shape and then create stiffeners in the connection using a system component detail. Near the bottom end of the column at grid A-2 is a Tube Gusset (20) connection.

In the figure on the left we see the connection before the stiffeners have been added. In the figure on the right we see how the connection will look after the stiffeners have been added.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

Create component basic views

Select the component symbol, right-click and select Create view > Component basic
views.

Explode gusset plate connection

Inside of the system connection we are not able to reshape the gusset plate the way it is shown in the figure above. In situations where the connection parameters do not contain a particular option, we must edit the parts outside of the connection. In order to modify connection objects outside the connection, we need to explode the connection. Exploding ungroups the objects in a connection. Modifications when done outside of the connection dialog without first exploding the connection will result in the changes being overwritten if the connection were to get updated. Before exploding the connection you should take advantage of the connection to get as close to the desired result as possible since editing connection macros is faster and easier than editing objects outside the connection.

Explode connection

To explode the connection: Select gusset plates connection symbol, right-click and select Explode component. All connection objects (even if they are set to "not visible" in the view properties) will become visible. Now all of these objects have lost intelligence and association to the connection dialog.

Reshape the gusset plate

We will now reshape the gusset plate as shown in the figure below by editing the polygon plate using the Edit polygon shape command.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

Create a construction line

We will first create a temporary construction line to help to locate the bottom right corner of the gusset plate. 1. Click the Create construction line icon.

2.

Pick the top right corner of the gusset plate as the starting point of the line.

3.

Type 0,0,-500 to define the end point of the construction line (-500 mm in the z direction from the last picked point).

As you type, the Enter a numeric location dialog box is automatically displayed.

4.

Press Enter and the construction line is created

Instead of recreating the polygon plate we will now reshape the existing plate by using the Create line cut command.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Detailing>Line cut
Edit polygon shape

1.

Select the Create line cut icon and follow the instructions on the command line.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Pick the gusset plate as the part to be cut. Pick the intersection of the gusset plate edge and the construction line. Snap to the perpendicular point on the gusset plate edge and pick point. (Make sure you pick the plate edge and not the gridline). Pick the bottom corner as the side to be removed. The plate is now reshaped.

The construction line is no longer needed and you can delete it.

Add stiffeners
We will now add stiffeners to our connection using the Multiple Stiffeners (1064) detail. When we open the details dialog box we can see which options are available to us for creating the stiffeners. In this case we are interested in setting the stiffener spacing and the edge distance from the edge of the stiffener to the edge of the column. We can then measure the column to get the parameters exactly as desired.
Measure dimensions

1.

Take the following measurements in the model: Click the Create X measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dimension as shown below:

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

2.

Click the Create Y measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dimension as shown below:

Create stiffeners using macro

1.

Open the component catalog (Ctrl+F) and find the Multiple stiffeners (1064) component. Double-click on the component icon.

2.

Edit the fields shown highlighted on each of the tab pages below and click Apply (study the association with the dimensions taken in the model and note the tolerances).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

3. 4.

Pick the column. Pick the midpoint of the gusset plate, and the stiffeners are created.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

You can see the final result in the figures below.

We could now explode the stiffener detail but since we have not edited the connection objects except for the detail we can also just leave it. In the next lesson, Lesson 4: Custom element, you will learn to group objects in your own user-defined connections.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

3.2 Create an End Plate Connection from Scratch

Sometimes you may need to create all the objects for a connection interactively from scratch. As an example we will now create plates, a polygon cut, a fitting, a bolt group and welds interactively in order to create the connection shown below.

Create plate and fitting for the beam

At grid intersection B-3 at level 13400:
Create connection basic views and delete the connection

1. 2.

Select the existing end plate connection, right-click and select Create view > Component basic views. Delete the existing connection.

Create end plate for the beam

We will now use the beam command to create the end plate for the beam.

1.

Start the beam command and Apply the properties for the end plate shown in the dialog box below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

10

It is possible to create plates by using either the beam or the contour plate command.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

11

In the Component front view: 2. 3. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the intersection of the beam lower flange and the column flange (1) to set the From location coordinates. Then use the cursor to snap (do not pick!) at the top right corner of the column (2) to set the correct direction.

4.

Type 10 for the numeric location (the Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically) and press Enter.

The cursor picks to the desired start position (which equals 10 mm from point 1 in the direction of point 2).

5.

To pick the end position, hold down the Ctrl key and pick position (2). Then use the cursor to snap to position (1). Type 10 for the numeric location and press Enter (which equals 10 mm from point 2 in the direction of point 1).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

12

The plate then appears.

Fit the end of a beam

We will use the Fitting command to trim the end of the beam at the end plate. The Fitting tool will trim the end of the beam on a plane perpendicular to the view plane, which is defined by picking two points on a line. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Fine-tuning part shape > Fitting 1. Click on the Create fitting icon.

2. 3.

Select the beam as the part to be fitted. Pick the points on the end plate corners to set the cut line for the fitting.

Tekla Structures displays the fitting in the model using a blue fitting symbol.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

13

Create a plate for the column

We will now use the Create contour plate command to create a plate for the column. We will use the Component end view for ease of picking points to place the plate. We will then move the plate to the correct depth. Help: Modeling > Parts > Steel parts commands > Contour plate

Create column plate

1.

Start the Create contour plate command.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

14

2.

Apply the properties for the plate as shown below:

In the Component end view: 3. Let the cursor snap to the top left corner of the end plate and type z to lock the z coordinate.

4.

Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the top left corner of the column to set the From location coordinates.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

15

5.

Let the cursor snap to the inner side of the flange shown, type 5 and press Enter.

The first point for the plate is now picked.

6.

Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the top right corner of the column to set the From location coordinates.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

16

7. 8. 9.

Let the cursor snap to the inner side of the flange, type 5 and press Enter. The second point is now picked. Press z to release the coordinate lock.

10. Let the cursor snap to the bottom right corner of the end plate and type z to lock the z coordinate.

11. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to pick the third point for the plate. 12. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to pick the last position for the plate. 13. Press z to release the coordinate.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

17

14. Press the middle button to create the plate. The plate is created in the view plane of the Component end view.

Move the plate

1. 2.

Select the column connection plate, right-click and select Move > Translate... Move the plate in the x direction (and only x) so that it is next to the end plate.

Fitting the column

The column connection plate is now in the correct position but it collides with the column flanges. We will use the Create part cut command to cut the column with the plate. We will then enlarge the antimatter cut to add some clearance between the plate and the column flanges. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Detailing>Part cut
Create part cut for the column

1.

Click the Create part cut icon.

2. 3.

Pick the column as the part to be cut. Pick the plate as the cutting part.

The column is now cut exactly along the edges of the connection plate.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

18

We will next enlarge the antimatter cut. Since the column connection plate and the part cut are now in exactly the same space, it would be hard to select the correct chamfers to modify.

That's why we will temporarily hide the column connection plate and then move the cut chamfers.
Move the cut chamfers

1.

Select the column connection plate (only the plate, using select switch Select parts shown below), right-click and select Hide.

2.

Turn the Select all select switch back on. Select both upper chamfers (using Ctrl).

3.

Move the chamfers 20 mm upwards.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

19

4. 5. 6.

Select the lower chamfers and move them 5 mm downwards. Select the right side chamfers and move them 20 mm right. Select the left side chamfers, move them 20 mm left.

Create welds
Next we will weld the end plate to the beam and the column connection plate to the column. This will also add the plates to the beam and column assemblies. Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Weld
Weld column plate to the beam

1.

Double-click on the Create weld icon.

2.

Edit the Weld properties dialog as shown below and click OK.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

20

3. 4.

Select the beam as the part to weld to (the primary part for workshop welds). Select the end plate as the part to be welded (the secondary part for workshop welds). It is very important to enter the welding order correctly. Tekla Structures uses the welding order to determine the primary and secondary parts of the assembly. This affects the position of the parts in the drawings.

Inquire assembly

You can check assemblies using the command Inquire Assembly. 1. 2. Pick the beam (or any part of the assembly). Right-click and select Inquire > Assembly.

The main part of the assembly will appear red and other parts will appear yellow. To select the entire assembly: press the Alt key while clicking a part in the assembly.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

21

If your weld was not automatically placed in the desired position, you can manually affect the location by setting the desired position for the weld in the Weld properties dialog box.

Weld connection plate to the column

By using the applied weld properties, weld the connection plate to the column.

Create bolt group

Next we will create a bolt group to connect the beam to the column. We will use the bolts to bolt the beams end plate to the columns connection plate. For information on bolt group dimensions see: Help: Modeling > Detailing > Bolts > Creating a bolt group
Create bolts

1.

Double-click on the Create bolts icon.

2.

Define bolt group properties as shown in the picture below and Apply.

3. 4.

Pick the column connection plate as the part to bolt to. Pick the end plate as the part to be bolted.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

22

5. 6. 7.

Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts. Pick the end plate top point as the first point (this will be the bolt group origin). Pick the end plate bottom point as the second point (this will indicate the bolt group's x direction).

The bolt group has now been created and the final connection looks like in the figures below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

23

3.3 Create Cuts Interactively

You can cut parts by various methods in Tekla Structures. The available cuts are: Line cut Polygon cut Part cut There are numerous places in our model in which the parts are still colliding with each other, and the shape of the parts needs to be modified with the cutting tools. We will use these cutting tools to cut the concrete slabs with the Silos (part cut) and then create a penetration for a column (polygon cut) through a hollow-core slab.

Create part cuts for silos

Create part cut

1.

Click the Create part cut icon.

2. 3. 4.

Pick one of the slabs as the part to be cut. Pick the related silo as the cutting part. Click on the middle mouse button. The slab is now cut. A blue antimatter part cut the same size as the silo appears.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

24

Change part cut profile

In order to have clearance between the concrete slab and the silo we will now modify the size of the profile used to make the part cut. 1. Disable all of the selection switches except for the Select cuts switch. This makes it easier to select the part cut.

2. 3. 4.

Double-click on the part cut. The Column properties dialog box appears. Uncheck all the modify check boxes and change only the profile as shown in the dialog below:

5.

Click Modify.

This creates a 150 mm gap all the way around between the slab and the silo.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

25

The part cut height is still equal to the height of the cutting part (= the silo). Sometimes it is more convenient to work with shorter part cuts. By inquiring the slab (select object, right-click, select Inquire > Part) you can see that the slab bottom level is +13400 and top level +13575.
Change part cut height

Double-click on the blue part cut to open the Column properties dialog box. On the
Position tab page:

1. 2.

Change the bottom level to 13000 and top level to 13800. Click Modify.

Now the part cut is just a little thicker than the slab, which is enough.

Copy the part cut to the other silo

1.

Copy it 9000 mm in the x direction to the other silo.

The antimatter part will automatically adjust to the new situation and cut the other slab.

Create slab penetration (polygon cut)

We will now create a penetration through a slab using a polygon cut. We will create a 20 mm clearance between the penetrating column and the slab simply by picking positions to outline the polygon cut. You should always define the polygon so that there is some tolerance between the edges of the part and the edges of the cut. If the edge of a cutting polygon is in exactly the same position as the edge of the part to be cut, it can be unclear whether the edge should be cut away.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

26

Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Polygon cut
Create polygon cut

1.

In the view +3850 zoom close to the column on grid A-4.

2.

Click the Create polygon cut icon.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Select the hollow-core slab as the part to be cut. Hold down the Ctrl key and pick the bottom left corner of the column to set the From location coordinates. Type -20,-20, Press Enter, the cursor picks the point. Press o (to snap to positions in orthogonal directions). Move the cursor to the right to the track along the ortho line.

8. 9.

Enter 340 to specify the distance from the last point picked. Press Enter. Move the cursor upwards, type 330 and press Enter.

10. Move the cursor to the left, type 340 and press Enter.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

27

11. Click the middle mouse button to create the polygon cut.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Interactive Steel Detailing

28

Custom Components for Precast Concrete

Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 19, 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents..................................................................................................................................i

Custom Components for Precast Concrete ..............................................................3

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Define Custom Part of Fastener Plate .......................................................................................3 Define Brace Fastener Plate Custom Connections ...................................................................8 Use Your New Custom Connections in the Model...................................................................12 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail .............................................................................16 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail ..................................................................20

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents

Custom Components for Precast Concrete

In this lesson

Tekla Structures contains a set of tools for defining intelligent connections, parts, seams, and details, called custom components. Help: Detailing > Custom components In this lesson we will define few custom components (a custom part, two custom connections and one custom detail) then use the custom components in the model and finally edit the custom detail a little to make it parametric. You will learn how to:
Define custom components Use custom components

Edit custom component to make them parametric

4.1 Define Custom Part of Fastener Plate

You can build custom components (connection, part, detail or seam) either by exploding and modifying an existing component, or by creating the component objects individually as we did in lesson 3. You then define a custom component by picking the objects to include in the custom component, and specifying the information the user needs to input, for example, main part, secondary parts, or points they need to pick. You can then apply the custom component to similar framing conditions in the model. We will now create a custom part from the fastener plate, which was interactively created in Lesson 3. By changing the group of objects to a custom component we can use it in other places of the model inside other custom components and in other models. In next chapter we will use this custom part as a sub component in a custom connection Help: Detailing > Custom components > Defining custo m components > Defining a custom component

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

Clean model view

1. Turn off Reinforcing bars and fittings in the 3D view and display the rest of the objects.

2. Zoom in close to the fastener plate that was interactively created between a column and bracing in lesson 3.

You can also create a part basic view when you need to see a specific part clearly. This places the part in the center of the view and fits the work area according to this part. To further improve the view, use the Hide command to hide adjacent parts, such as the two braces on the other side of the column.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

Define Fastener plate custom part

1. Select Detailing > Define custom component to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. 2. On the Type/Notes tab, set Type to Part, enter a name and description (description is not mandatory) for the custom component as shown. Click Next>.

The Custom component types available: Connection: A connection is 2 or more items connected together and is defined as having a main part and 1 or more secondary parts Detail: A detail connects one or more items at the end of, or along the length of, a main part Part: A part is a component in the model such as a ladder or cell form beam Seam: A seam creates seam objects along part or connects two parts along the parts' axial direction.

3. Drag the mouse from left to right as shown below to select the needed fastener plate objects (i.e. plate , studs and welds totally within that rectangular) click Next> on the wizard page 2/3.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

Be careful not to select objects (e.g. parts, fittings, or rebars) that do not belong to this component. Otherwise, when you use the custom component, those objects will also be created.

4. Select two positions: first the plate's lower definition point and then the upper. Click Finish on wizard page 3/3.

The new custom part that you have defined is added to the Custom components dialog box list. You are now able to create this custom part (instead of creating plate, studs and welds separately) in your model by selecting it in the component catalog and creating it by picking two definition points.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

4.2 Define Brace Fastener Plate Custom Connections

We will now define the brace connection as a custom connection. We will include the custom part just created to this custom connection. We could also have defined the custom connection straight away from the interactively created objects. Defining a custom connection that includes a custom part enables us later, for example, to change the nested custom part to another one (a different size of fastener plate).

Define Brace(2) custom component

1. Select Detailing > Define custom component to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. 2. Set Type to Connection, enter a name and description

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

3. On the Position tab set the Position type to Box plane and click Next>.
Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Position type

4. Make sure you have Select component select switch pressed down. This enables the selecting of a component (instead of just component objects).

5. Use area select from right to left to select all (and only) the objects belonging to the component (custom part, the fittings and the site welds), click Next > on the wizard page 2/4.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

Site welds and fittings must be visible in the view in order for you to be able to select them. If you are not sure, check the view properties!

Tekla Structures ignores the main part, secondary parts, grids and component symbols when selecting objects to include in the custom component. 6. Select the column as the main part and click Next> on wizard page 3/4. 7. With the Ctrl button pressed down, select the upper brace and the lower brace as secondary parts, click Finish on wizard page 4/4. Tekla Structures displays a connection symbol for the new Custom component. Following the procedure above, we will now define another custom connection at the bottom end of the brace on gridline 2. The only difference now is the name of the connection and that we define only one secondary for the connection.
Define Brace(1) custom connection

1. Select Detailing > Define custom component to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. 2. Set Type to Connection, enter a name and description. Define the position type as box plane.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

10

3. Use area select to select all the objects belonging to the component (, click Next> on the wizard page 2/4.

4. Select the column as the main part and click Next> on wizard page 3/4. 5. Select the brace as the secondary part and click Finish on wizard page 4/4. Tekla Structures displays a connection symbol for the new Custom component.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

11

4.3 Use Your New Custom Connections in the Model

We will now use the custom components just defined to connect the rest of the braces in the model.
Create Brace(2) custom component

1. Open the component catalog.

2. Search with the word fastener.

3. Double-click on the Brace(2) connection to display the properties.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

12

4. Review the properties and click Apply.

Help: Detailing > Custom components > Defining Custom components > Custom components basic properties

5. Pick the column as the main part and the upper and lower brace as the secondary parts and click middle button to create the connection.

The custom component is created.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

13

Once the custom component is created it has no intelligence or input values. In practice you can apply the custom component only in framing conditions similar to those for which it was originally created.
Test the Change in the column size

We will now check how the Custom component reacts when the situation changes in the model. 1. Change the column size from 380*380 to 600*600, Modify.

Since we selected Box plane as the position type (= where the main part cross section box and the center line of the secondary part intersect), the connection will automatically adjust to the change in the primary profile size. 2. Click the Undo icon to change the beam back to 380*380.

Test the change in the brace sloping angle

3. Change the sloping angle of braces by moving the handles in the other end from the connection in z direction.

Since the fittings are created according to the main part, the cuts of the brace ends will be correct despite the change of the sloping angle.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

14

4. Undo the changes of the brace sloping angles.

Create Brace (1) custom components

1.

Click Brace(1) connection in the component catalog.

2. Create connections to the remaining column brace situations in the model.

You can either create separate custom components for each different case needed in the model or you can parameterize the custom component (see the next section).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

15

4.4 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail

We will now create a custom detail that cuts a hole through a hollow-core slab.

Create a part cut through a hollow-core slab

First we will create a part cut through a hollow-core slab by using a column to define the shape of the cut.
Create cutting part

1.

Select the hollow-core slab on level +3850 closest to grid 7-B and create a part basic view of it: right-click and select Create view > Part basic view.

2. To create square part cut of size 380*380 mm: Double-click on the Create concrete column icon and define column size and position. Close the dialog with OK.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

16

If necessary, restart the column command and then pick the middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab while holding Ctrl button down (this is a reference point for column position). Release the Ctrl button, and type -1000,0,0 press Enter to create the column 1000 mm from the edge.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

17

Cut part

Cut the hollow-core slab using part cut: 3. Pick the Create part cut icon.

4. Pick the hollow-core slab. 5. Pick the column. 6. To end the command right-click and select Interrupt. 7. Remove the cutting part.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

18

Define a custom detail

Next we will create a detail type custom component.
Define custom component

1. Select Detailing > Define custom component to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. 2. On the Type/Notes tab, set the Type to Detail, enter a Name and a Description (description is not mandatory) for the custom component as shown below.

3. Select the objects (cut + hollow-core slab using the Ctrl key) and press Next >. 4. Pick the main part (hollow-core slab) and press Next >. 5. Select middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab to set the position. 6. Click Finish.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

19

4.5 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail

The User_Hole_Creation custom detail is defined as a custom component but as yet has no intelligence or input values. In order to add these capabilities we have to edit the custom component. We will not create a complete parametric custom component here, but we will give you an idea how to build some simple dependencies between component objects and the model. We will create the following variables to automatically adjust to suit a change in hole position, size and shape and we will also input them in the finished connection interface: The hole position in x direction The hole position in y direction The hole size and shape

Open Custom Component Editor

Edit custom component

1.

Select the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol.

2. Right-click and select Edit custom component. A new toolbar named Custom component editor opens along with the Model browser and four basic views of the custom component.

Define parameters
Hole size and shape

1.

Open variables dialog by clicking on the Display variables icon.

2. Add a new variable by pressing the Add button. 3. Define the Value type as Profile. 4. Set the Formula to 380*380. 5. In the Label in dialog box field, enter Hole shape.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

20

6. Select Part cut from the Custom component browser. 7. Under General properties, select Profile of the part cut. 8. Right-click Profile and select Add equation to edit the name. 9. Type Profile=P1 (variable name).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

21

Bind hole definition points

We will define the hole position by binding the part cut's reference points.
1. Select the part cut in any of the views.

2. Select the upper reference point. 3. Right-click and select Bind to plane command.

4. Select Component planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu.

5. Zoom in to the detail symbol. 6. Rotate to highlight the XY plane. 7. Pick the detail's XY plane.

8. Rotate to highlight the YZ plane. 9. Pick the YZ plane.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

22

10. Select Boundary planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu. 11. Zoom out and rotate to highlight the top boundary plane of the slab. 12. Pick the top plane.

You have now bound the upper reference point in three directions. The distances are now visible in the Variables dialog. Repeat steps 3 - 12 to the part cut's lower reference point by binding it to XY and YZ directions in the Component plane and to slab bottom plane using Boundary plane.
Edit hole definition variables

We will next edit the hole position variables and define their visibility on the detail's dialog.
1. Open the Variables dialog.

2. Edit D1 variable: Label: Distance from middle. 3. Edit D2 variable: Label: Distance from definition point. 4. Edit D3 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide. 5. Edit D4 variable: Formula: =D1, Visibility: Hide. 6. Edit D5 variable: Formula: =D2, Visibility: Hide.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

23

7. Edit D6 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide. 8. Close editor, save changes.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

24

Check the results

We will now check that the dialog custom detail dialog has the fields that we needed and that they function correctly.
Modify custom detail

1.

Double-click on the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol. A dialog opens.

2. Change cut size and location, press Modify.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

25

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Precast Concrete

26

Custom Components for Steel

Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 21, 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents..................................................................................................................................i

Custom Components for Steel ...................................................................................3

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Define User_end_plate Custom Component .............................................................................3 Create User_end_plate Custom Component.............................................................................7 Parameterize User_end_plate Custom Connection.................................................................10 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail .............................................................................19 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail ..................................................................23

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents

Custom Components for Steel

In this lesson

This lesson introduces custom components and details. You will learn how to: Define custom components Use custom components Edit custom components to make them adaptive and parametric

4.1 Define User_end_plate Custom Component

You can build custom components either by exploding and modifying an existing component, or by creating the component objects individually as we did in lesson 2. You then define a custom component by picking the objects to include in the custom component, and specifying the information the user needs to input, for example, main part, secondary parts, or points they need to pick. You can then apply the custom component to similar framing conditions in the model. We will now create a custom component from the column-beam connection, which was interactively created in Lesson 3. By changing the connection to a custom component you can use it in other parts of the model and in other models.

Zoom in close to the component, which was interactively created between a column and a beam in lesson 3. Make sure that all of the object types are visible in the view (welds, cuts, fittings, bolts, etc).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

Define Custom component

1. 2.

Select Detailing > Define custom component to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. On the Type/Notes tab, set Type to Connection, enter a name and description (description is not mandatory) for the custom component as shown.

The Custom component types available: Component: A Component is 2 or more items connected together and is defined as having a main part and 1 or more secondary parts Detail: A Detail connects one or more items at the end of, or along the length of, a main part Part: A Part is a component in the model such as a ladder or cell form beam Seam: A seam creates seam objects and connects parts along a line picked
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

with two points.

3.

On the Position tab set the Position type to Box plane and click Next>.

Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Position type

4.

Use area select to select all the objects belonging to the component, click Next> on the wizard page 2/4.

Be careful that you do not select objects (e.g. parts, bolts, welds or cuts) not belonging to this component. Otherwise when you use the custom component those objects will also be created. Tekla Structures ignores the main part, secondary parts, grids and component symbols when you are selecting objects to include in the Custom component.

5.

Select the column as the main part and click Next> on wizard page 3/4.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

6.

Select the beam as the secondary part and click Finish on wizard page 4/4.

Tekla Structures displays a connection symbol for the new Custom component.

The new custom component that you have defined is added to Custom components dialog box list.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

4.2 Create User_end_plate Custom Component

We will now use the custom component that you just defined to create a connection at the other end of the beam.
Create custom component

1. 2.

Delete the End plate 144 connection from the other end of the beam. Open the component catalog.

3.

Select the User_end_plate component on the list.

4.

Right-click and select Properties...

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

5.

Review the properties and click Apply. Help: Detailing > Custom components > Defining Custom components > Custom components basic properties

6.

Pick the column as the main part and the beam as the secondary part.

The custom component is created.

Change the beam size

We will now check how the Custom component reacts when the situation changes. 1. Change the beam size from IPE600 to IPE750*137, Modify.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

Once the custom component is created it has no intelligence or input values. In practice you can apply the custom component only in similar framing conditions to that which it was originally created.

2.

Click the Undo icon to change the beam back to IPE600.

You can either create separate custom components for each different case needed in the model or you can parameterize the custom component (see the next section).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

4.3 Parameterize User_end_plate Custom Connection

The User_end_plate connection is defined as a custom component but as yet has no intelligence or input values. In order to add these capabilities we have to edit the custom component. We will not create a complete parametric custom component in this lesson, but we will give you an idea how to build some simple dependencies between the component objects and the model. We will create variables that will automatically adjust to suit a change in the beam profile and we will also input them in the finished connection interface: The end plate top and bottom position (which also defines the plate length) The distance from the first bolt to the beam top flange We will then create the following variables to automatically adjust to suit a change in the beam profile: Column plate top position Part cut top position

Open Custom Component Editor

Since we have a custom component in the model we can open the Custom component editor.
Edit custom component

1. 2.

Select the User_end_plate component symbol. Right-click and select Edit custom component.

The Custom component editor opens along with the Custom component editor toolbar, the Custom component browser and four views of the custom component.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

10

In the Custom component editor, you can create your own components and details and define their properties. You can build in dependencies between objects to make custom components parametric and have them adapt to changes in the model.

Define end plate top and bottom positions

Our end plate is modeled with the beam command using plate profile PL20*230. This means the thickness (20) and the width (230) of the plate are defined by the profile. To change the thickness or the width of the plate we will need to parameterize the profile. The length is defined by the start and end points picked for the "beam"(plate). We will now create dependencies between the end points and secondary beam top and bottom flanges.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

11

Tie end plate top to secondary beam top

1.

Select the end plate.

2.

Select the upper handle of the end plate.

3.

Right-click and select Bind to plane.

By moving the cursor around you can now highlight the available planes. 4. Highlight the plane on the secondary beam top flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

12

The appropriate dimension in the model will appear on the screen.

Tie end plate bottom to secondary beam bottom

By following the same procedure tie the end plate lower handle to secondary beam bottom plane. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the end plate. Select the lower handle of the end plate. Right-click and select Bind to plane. Highlight the plane on the secondary beam bottom flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.

The appropriate dimension in the model should then appear on the screen.

Define distance from beam top flange to the first bolt

We will now add a variable to control the distance from the top of the beam to the first bolt.
Remove the bolt offset

To make it simpler to use the new variable, we will first remove the original offset from the bolt. This way the value added in the dialog will be the distance from the top of the beam to the first bolt. 1. 2. Double-click on the bolt group to open the Bolt properties dialog box. Change the Start point offset Dx to 0, click Modify.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

13

Tie 1st bolt to secondary beam top

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select the bolt group. Select the upper handle of the bolt group. Right-click and select Bind to plane. Highlight the plane on the secondary beam top flange, and select it by clicking the mouse.

The appropriate dimension in the model appears on the screen.

Display and test the variables

1.

Click the Display variables icon to see all distance and parameter variables in a component.

The Variables dialog box appears: Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > Variables 2. Change the value of the lowest variable (the bolt distance), from 10 to 60 and press
Enter.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

14

Set the variable labels in dialog

3. 4.

To show the variables in the custom component dialog box set the variable visibility to
Show.

Change the field names in the custom component dialog box by naming the variable labels as shown below.

Tie column plate and cut part top to beam top flange
Next we will tie the top of the column connection plate and the top of the part cut to the top flange of the beam. The column end plate (as well as the part cut) was modeled as a contour plate. Unlike beam, a contour plate does not have handles that we can bind. Instead, we can create distance variables from the contour plate chamfers to a plane. Instead of binding the chamfers one by one to a plane we will create a magnetic custom plane on the top face of the contour plate. We will then bind this magnetic plane to the beam top flange. The top face of the contour plate will then move with the magnetic plane. Help: Detailing > Custom components > Custom components reference > User defined planes
Create user defined planes

1.

Click the Create construction plane icon.

2.

Pick three corner points of the top of the column plate.

3.

Click middle button and the plane is created.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

15

While still in the command: 4. 5. Pick three corners points at the top of the plate part cut. Click the middle button and the plane is created.

Edit custom planes to be magnetic

1.

Double-click one of the user planes that you just created to open the Construction plane properties dialog. You must have the plane Select planes switch active:

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

16

2.
Bind magnetic planes to beam top

Tick the Magnetic switch on and click Modify. Select the magnetic custom plane. Right-click and select Bind to plane. Pick the highlighted plane on the top of the secondary beam. Repeat for the other plane.

3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

Close the editor by clicking the Close editor icon.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

17

In a case where we would like to keep the existing Custom component in our model we could choose to save the custom component with a new name.
Change the beam size

Change the beam size from IPE600 to IPE750*137, Modify.

Test the variables

In the custom component dialog change each of the variables and Modify to test their function.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

18

4.4 Define User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail

We will now create a custom detail that cuts a hole through a hollow-core slab.

Create a part cut through a hollow-core slab

First we will create a part cut through a hollow-core slab by using a column to define the shape of the cut.
Create cutting part

1.

Select the hollow-core slab on level +3850 closest to grid 7-B and create a part basic view of it: right-click and select Create view > Part basic view.

2.

To create square part cut of size 380*380 mm: Double-click on the Create concrete column icon and define column size and position. Close the dialog with OK.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

19

If necessary, restart the column command and then pick the middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab while holding Ctrl button down (this is a reference point for column position). Release the Ctrl button, and type r to open Enter numeric location dialog.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

20

Type @-1000,0,0 and press Enter to create the column 1000 mm from the edge.

Cut part

Cut the hollow-core slab using part cut: 1. Pick the Create part cut icon.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Pick the hollow-core slab. Pick the column. To end the command right-click and select Interrupt. Remove the cutting part.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

21

Define a custom detail

Next we will create a detail type custom component.
Define custom component

1. 2.

Select Detailing > Define custom component to open the Custom component wizard dialog box. On the Type/Notes tab, set the Type to Detail, enter a Name and a Description (not mandatory) for the custom component as shown below and click Next >.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Select the objects (cut + hollow-core slab using the Ctrl key) and press Next >. Pick the main part (hollow-core slab) and press Next >. Select middle point at the outer end of the hollow-core slab to set the position. Press Finish.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

22

4.5 Parameterize User_Hole_Creation Custom Detail

The User_Hole_Creation custom detail is defined as a custom component but as yet has no intelligence or input values. In order to add these capabilities we have to edit the custom component. We will not create a complete parametric custom component here, but we will give you an idea how to build some simple dependencies between component objects and the model. We will create the following variables to automatically adjust to suit a change in hole position, size and shape and we will also input them in the finished connection interface: The hole position in x direction The hole position in y direction The hole size and shape

Open Custom Component Editor

Edit custom component

1. 2.

Select the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol. Right-click and select Edit custom component. A new toolbar named Custom component editor opens along with the Custom component browser and 4 basic views of the custom component.

Define parameters
Hole size and shape

1.

Open variables dialog by pushing the Display variables icon.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Add new variable by pressing the Add button. Define the Value type as Profile. Set the Formula to 380*380. In the Label in dialog box field enter Hole shape.

6. 7.

Select Part cut from the Custom component browser. Under General properties, select Profile of the part cut.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

23

8.

Type Profile=P1 (variable name).

Bind hole definition points

We will define the hole position by binding the part cut's reference points. 1. 2. 3. Select the part cut in any of the views. Select the upper reference point. Right-click and select Bind to plane command.

4.

Select Component planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

24

5. 6. 7.

Zoom in to the detail symbol. Rotate to highlight the XY plane. Pick the detail's XY plane.

8. 9.

Rotate to highlight the YZ plane. Pick the YZ plane.

10. Select Boundary planes from Custom component editor toolbar's drop down menu. 11. Zoom out and rotate to highlight the top boundary plane of the slab. 12. Pick the top plane.

You have now bound the upper reference point in three directions. The distances are now visible in Variables dialog. Repeat steps 3 - 12 to the part cut's lower reference point by binding it to XY and YZ directions in the Component plane and to slab bottom plane using Boundary plane.
Edit hole definition variables

We will next edit the hole position variables and define their visibility on the detail's dialog. 1. Open the Variables dialog.

2. 3. 4.

Edit D1 variable: Label: Distance from middle. Edit D2 variable: Label: Distance from definition point. Edit D3 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

25

5. 6. 7. 8.

Edit D4 variable: Formula: =D1, Visibility: Hide. Edit D5 variable: Formula: =D2, Visibility: Hide. Edit D6 variable: Formula: 100, Visibility: Hide. Close editor, save changes.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

26

Check the results

We will now check that the dialog custom detail dialog has the fields that we needed and that they function correctly.
Modify custom detail

1. 2.

Double-click on the User_Hole_Creation custom detail symbol. A dialog opens. Change cut size and location, press Modify.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Custom Components for Steel

27

Basic Modeling 2

Tekla Structures 12.0 Basic Training September 20, 2006

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents..................................................................................................................................i

Basic Modeling 2.........................................................................................................3

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 Start a New Model - BasicModel2 .............................................................................................4 Setting Up Job Specific Information...........................................................................................7 Create Concrete Members ......................................................................................................11 Create Steel Members.............................................................................................................23 Combine Models 1 and 2.........................................................................................................41 Define Your Own Select Filters................................................................................................45

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents

Basic Modeling 2

In this lesson

In this lesson we will cover some preliminary tasks that you need to do before starting to model in a real project. We will create a new model and recap the basic functions introduced in lesson 1. After that, you will learn some more about the basic functions. You will learn how to: Set up project information Define part properties and numbering series Work in true planes (sloped, skewed) Use phases Combine separate models Create your own select filters

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

5.1 Start a New Model - BasicModel2

Start a new model and name it BasicModel2.

Create new model

Start a new model

1.

Pick the New icon.

2. 3.

Save in C:\TeklaStructuresModels, type Model name "BasicModel2". Click the OK button and the model will be created.

Create grid
We will now create a grid for the model. In order to combine Basic Model 1 and Basic Model 2 later, we will take into account the positioning of Basic Model 1 and define the origin of Basic Model 2 grid to be 0,13900,0 in the global coordinates. The grid is created according to the work plane, the current local coordinate system, of the model. So before creating the grid we will temporarily position the work plane to the global coordinates 0,13900,0.

The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the current local coordinate system of the model. Most of the commands dependent on the coordinate system use work plane coordinates.

You can create a skew grid by first setting the work plane to the desired skew position.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Set Work plane to a new position

1. 2.

On the menu, select View > Work plane > With one point. Type 0,13900, click Enter or OK.

The work plane is positioned in global 0,13900,0

You can also create a grid and then move the grid with the Move command.

You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single picked point.

Create the grid

1. 2.

Delete the default grid (if there exists one). Double-click on the Create grid line icon.

3. 4. 5.

Edit the grid, in the Grid properties dialog box, according to the grids shown in the figure above (coordinates and text). Click Create. Enter GRID2 in the Save as field and click the Save as button to save the grid values.

Fit work area

1. 2.

Click anywhere in the view. Right-click and select Fit work area.

The view should now look like the one below.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Create plane views along gridlines

We will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines.
Create grid views

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select the grid. Right-click and select Create view > Grid views from the pop-up menu. Click the Show button on each view plane to open the View properties dialog box, set the view properties the way you want and click OK. Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

5.2 Setting Up Job Specific Information

Prior to adding any parts we will setup the model with the necessary job specific information: Project properties Preferences Part properties and numbering series

Project properties
Project properties are common to all drawings and can be used to fill in typical information in the title blocks.
Set up project properties

1. 2. 3.

Open the Project properties dialog box by selecting Properties-> Project Fill in the information as shown in the dialog box below. Press OK.

Check preferences
Before starting the modeling we will check that preferences are set up correctly. Help: System > Using Tekla Structures effectively > General > Preferences
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Check that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. If you change settings on the Preferences tab, Tekla Structures only applies the new settings to connections you subsequently create. Connections you created prior to changing the preferences are not affected.

Check preferences

1. 2.

Open Setup > Options On the Preferences tab check the values are as below, click OK.

Part properties and numbering series

You use a numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) to divide parts, assemblies (steel detailing) and cast units (concrete detailing) into groups. For example, you can allocate separate numbering series to different phases or part types. You can name the numbering series to which a part, assembly or cast unit belongs, by using the part properties dialog box. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a starting number. If you already know in the beginning of the project how the members should be numbered it is a good idea to create the parts right from the start with the correct numbering series.
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Help: Modeling > Parts > Numbering parts > Defining numbers to be used for parts In a later lesson you will learn the basics of numbering parts in Tekla Structures; how numbering series result in different part / assembly /cast unit numbers, numbering settings etc.
Set the part properties

Go through each of the part properties dialog box (Beam properties, Column properties, Contour plate properties, etc.) and set them up with the information shown in the tables below and save each of them with a specific name. See the Adjust Beam properties example below the tables.

Steel members
Parts/ command Beam command: Beams Vertical braces Horizontal braces Rafters Purlins Column command: Columns Silos Contour plate command: Plates 1001 A 1 PLATE S355JR 99 PC PX 1 1 AC AX 1 1 COLUMN SILO S355JR S355JR 7 1 PB PV PH PR PP 1 1 1 1 1 AB AV AH AR AP 1 1 1 1 1 BEAM BRACING_V BRACING_H RAFTER PURLIN S355JR S355JR S355JR S355JR S355JR 6 3 3 9 8 Part prefix Part start no. Assembly prefix Assembly start no. Part name Material Class

Concrete members
Parts/ command Concrete beam command: Beams Hollow-core slabs Concrete column command: Columns Pad footing command: Pad footings Concrete slab
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

Cast unit prefix

Cast unit start no.

Part name

Material

Class

CB CH

1 1

BEAM HCSLAB

K40-1 K40-1

6 1

CC

COLUMN

K40-1

CP

FOOTING

K40-1

command: Slabs Example: Adjust beam properties CS 1 SLAB K40-1 4

1. 2.

Open the Beam properties dialog. Match the highlighted fields in the dialog box below.

Type the part name BEAM in the save as field and click the Save as button.

Save defaults
After you have set up the properties, you must save the Project properties and Preferences for this model with the Save defaults command. The Save defaults command creates a set of standard files which also include the part properties files. These standard properties are loaded when you open the model. In other words, when you want specific properties to be loaded by default when you open a model, set up and load the properties before using the Save defaults command. Help: System > Files and Folders > Customizing Tekla Structures > Save defaults
Save Defaults

Click Setup > Save defaults.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

10

5.3 Create Concrete Members

First we will create pad footings and columns on gridline 1 and then copy them to the other gridlines. We will then create beams on gridlines 1 and 3 and mirror them to the other side of the structure. With a slab generation macro, we will then create TT slabs on top of the beams at level 7175. Finally we will create a sloped grouting on top of the TT slabs.

Pre-cast footings
We will now create foundations on gridline 1.

2700*2700 footing

1.

Double-click on the Create pad footing icon.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

11

2. 3. 4. 5.
2100*2100 footing

Load the saved FOOTING properties. Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for a 2700*2700 footing as shown in the drawing. Click Apply. Pick grid intersections C-1 and F-1.

While still in the command: 6. 7. 8. Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for a 2100*2100 footing as shown in the drawing. Click Apply. Pick grid intersections D-1 and E-1.

The footings should now look like those shown below:

Pre-cast columns
Now we will create the columns on gridline 1.

900*600 columns

1.

Double-click on the Create Concrete column icon.

2. 3. 4.
600*600 columns

Load the COLUMN properties that you saved earlier. According to the drawing shown above, enter the information in the Concrete column properties dialog box for a 900*600 column, and click Apply. Pick the intersections of grids C-1 and then F-1.While still in the command:

Complete the dialog for 600*600 columns and create them on grid intersections D-1 and E-1.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

12

Copy the members

We will now copy the footings and columns to other gridlines.
Copy the members on gridlines C and F

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select the footings and columns on gridlines C and F. Right-click and select Copy > Translate on the pop-up menu. Pick two points to show the translation vector (6000 in x direction). Type in the number of copies (6). Click Copy.

Copy the members on gridlines D and E

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select the footings and columns on gridlines D and E. Right-click and select Copy > Translate on the pop-up menu. Pick two points to show the translation vector (12000 in x direction). Type in the number of copies (3). Click Copy.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

13

Pre-cast ledger beams

We will now create the beams on gridlines 1 and 3 at level +7175.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

14

Create beams on gridlines 1 and 3

1.

Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Load the BEAM properties that youve saved. Enter the information in the Concrete beam properties dialog box for gridline 1 beams according to the drawing above, click Apply. In the 3D view pick the reference point of the column at C-7175 . Still having the cursor snapping to the picked point, type z to lock the z coordinate and then pick the top point of the column at D-7175.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

15

6. 7. 8. 9.

End the command by clicking the middle mouse button. Still having the z coordinate locked, create the other two beams on gridline 1 in the same way. Enter the information for the beams on gridline 3 in the Concrete beam properties dialog box, click Apply. Create the gridline 3 beams.

10. Type z to unlock the z coordinate The model should now look as shown below.

Mirror the beams to gridlines 5 and 7

1. 2.

Select the beams just created on gridlines 1 and 3.

Copy special > Mirror the beams to the other end of the structure indicating two points on gridline 4 as the mirror line.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

16

The model now looks as shown below.

Pre-cast TT slabs
We will now create precast TT slabs on top of the framework by using the Modeling of Slab Area macro (88).
Create the TT slabs

3. 4. 5.

Find the Modeling of Slab Area macro (88) in the Component catalog. Double-click on the component to open the component dialog box. Complete the dialog box as shown and Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

17

6. 7. 8. 9.

In the PLAN +7175 view, pick positions 1 and 2 (the intersections of gridlines and the column edges) as shown, click the middle mouse button. Pick positions 3 and 4 as shown, click the middle mouse button. Pick positions 5 and 6, click the middle mouse button. Then, pick position 4.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

18

The slabs are created.

10. Select the macro symbol and copy it to the other spans.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

19

Second stage concrete / grouting

We will create grouting out of four symmetrical slabs. First, we create one slab, edit the sloping for the slab, and then copy-mirror the rest of the slabs.

Create the grouting

1. 2. 3. 4.

Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon. Load the SLAB properties that you saved earlier. Set the profile to 50 and the position in depth to Front and Apply. In the PLAN +7175 view, pick the four corners for the slab as shown. (1) Outer corner of the column (2) Intersection of the gridline and the column edge (3) Mid point of the gridline (4) Outer edge of the beam (Perpendicular snap)

5.

Click the middle mouse button to create the slab.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

20

We will next set the sloping for the grouting by editing the dz values of the three chamfers shown below.

Create the rest of the slabs

1.

Create the rest of the slabs (with Copy-Translate).

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

21

Set the sloping for the grouting

2. 3. 4.

Double-click on the chamfer. Set the Dz1 value to 150, Modify. Repeat this for the other two chamfers.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

22

5.4 Create Steel Members

First, we will create two columns on gridline 1 and then a rafter between them. After that we will create the construction points needed to create the horizontal bracing and purlins. We will copy-translate the completed portal frame and points. We will then replace the concrete columns on gridlines 2, 4 and 6, combining them with the upper steel columns so that they are turned into full-length steel columns. Utilizing a sloping work plane and view planes, we will model the horizontal bracing and purlins. Finally, we will create vertical bracing on gridlines C and F.

Steel columns
We first create two columns on gridline 1.

Create columns

1.

Double-click on the Create column icon.

2.

Load the COLUMN properties.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

23

3. 4. 5. 6.

Complete the Column properties (profile and levels) for the column at grid intersection C-1 as shown in the figure above and click Apply. Pick grid intersection C-1 to create the column. Complete the Column properties for the column at grid F-1, and click Apply. Pick the grid intersection F-1 to create the second column.

Since the profile depth of the concrete and steel columns are different (900*600 => h=900 while HEA 800 => h=790), middle positioning causes a gap in the outer face.

Use the Measure tool to measure the distance from the edge of the column to the edge of the slab.

Measure the gap

1.

Click on the Create y measure icon.

2. 3.

In the GRID 1 view pick the point in the slab corner, then the point in the column corner. Pick a position to place the dimension.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

24

The measure tools measure distances between two points in the view plane. Measures are visible in the rendered view window until you update or redraw the window.

Adjust the vertical position

Adjust the column edge to the slab (and concrete column) by using the vertical position offset in the Column properties dialog. 1. 2. Open the Column properties dialog box.
Modify the column on gridline C using a vertical offset of -55.

3.

Modify the column on gridline F using a vertical offset of 55.

Steel rafter
Now we will create a rafter between the two columns that we just created.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

25

Create rafter

1. 2. 3. 4.

Double-click on the Create beam icon. Load the RAFTER properties. Enter the rafter information in the dialog according to the drawing above (Profile: IPE750*160) and click Apply. In the GRID 1 view pick grid C-20200 and then F-18200.

Work points for horizontal bracing and purlins

After inputting the two columns and the rafter, we will layout points for modeling the purlins, and the vertical and horizontal braces.

Bracing work points

First, we need to create points at the intersection of grid C and the rafter centerline and the intersection of grid F and the rafter centerline. Then, using those points, we will create work points for the braces. To create a point at the intersection (indicated with a red arrow) of grid C and the rafter centerline:

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

26

Intersection of grid and rafter centerline

1.

Double-click on the Create divided line points icon.

2.

Type 1 (1 point) and pick the positions shown below.

Copy the point to the other side

To create the point in the intersection of grid F and the rafter centerline on the other end of the rafter, we simply copy the first point. 1. 2. Select the point just created, right-click and select Copy Translate Pick the start point of the rafter, then the end point of the rafter, then click Copy.

We will now create the work points for the first and the last brace.
First and last brace work points

1.

Double-click on the Create extension point icon.

2. 3.

Type -800, click OK. Pick one of the points just created, and then the other.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

27

4.

Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order.

Using the Create divided line points command to divide the space between the work points that you just created into ten equal spaces (9 points).
Divide the working points in ten segments

1.

Double-click on the Create divided line points icon.

2.

Enter 9 as the number of dividing points, click OK.

3.

Pick one of the work points that you just created, and then the other.

Purlins work points

We can now use the grid intersections C-20200 and F-18200 to create the work points for the first and last purlins.
First and last purlins work points

1.

Double-click on the Create extension point icon.

2. 3. 4.
Divide the working points in 12 segments

Type -600, click OK. Pick grid intersection C-20200, and then F-18200. Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order.

Using the Create divided line points command, divide the space between the work points that you just created into 12 equal spaces (11 points).

Copy the portal frame and the points

We will now copy the columns, the rafter and the points to gridlines 2-7.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

28

Copy the members

1.

Select the columns, the rafter and the points.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Right-click and select Copy > Translate. Pick two points to show the translation vector (6000 in x direction). Type the number of copies (6). Click Copy.

Combine columns
We modeled concrete columns also on gridlines 2, 4 and 6 even though they are not needed to support the concrete beams. We will now replace them with full length steel columns by combining them with the steel columns on top of them.
Combine columns

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

29

1. 2. 3. 4.

Select Edit > Combine from the menu. Pick the steel column at grid C-2. Pick the concrete column at grid C-2. Reply OK to both questions.

The columns are now combined. The combined column has inherited the properties of the steel column (the first picked part).

5.

Repeat the combining for the rest of the columns on gridlines 2, 4 and 6.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

30

1.

Set sloping work plane for bracing and purlins

The next step is to model the horizontal bracing and purlins of the sloped roof. To place the parts in the correct plane we will first change the work plane (which currently is the local coordinate system of the model) to the roof slope. Help: Modeling > Getting Started > Basics > Defining the work area and shifting the work plane Help: Modeling > Getting Started > View reference > View >Work plane>To part plane
Set work plane to the roof slope

To set the work plane to the roof slope: 1. Pick the Set Work plane to part top icon.

2.

Pick the rafter on gridline 1.

The work plane is now positioned in a plane parallel to the top plane of the rafter.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

31

The Set work plane to part plane command sets the work plane parallel to the part plane (front, top, back, bottom) on the center line of the part.

You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel to the current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single picked point.

True plan view

To make it easier to add the roof bracing we will now make a true plan view of the roof bracing by creating a view perpendicular to the work plane. We can also use the true plan view in drawings. Working in a true plan view makes it easier to model e.g. sloped objects since the grids are also shown in the true plan and points in the view plane are presented as yellow crosses. The part positioning, copying, etc, however, always comply with the work plane coordinate system no matter in which view you perform the commands.

Create true plan view

1. 2.

Pick Properties > View... Complete the properties as shown below, click OK.

3.

Select View > Create view > To workplane.

The new view is created. The work points created for braces appear in yellow since they are now on the view plane. The grid is also shown in the true plan view plane.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

32

Create horizontal bracing

Working in the true plan view, we will next create the horizontal bracing members using the Create beam tool.
Create horizontal bracing

1. 2.

Double-click on the Create beam icon. Load the BRACING_H properties.

Complete the dialog box according to the information shown in the drawing above and change the Position at depth to: Middle and Apply. 3. In the true plan view create the braces shown in the drawing by snapping to the yellow points.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

33

Check the positioning

Check the position of the braces in the 3D view and elevation view on grid 1.

We will now copy-mirror the braces to the other end of the building (between gridlines 4 and 5). Since the work plane is now at the same slope with the TRUE PLAN view, it is easy to pick the points for the mirror line. The Copy special > Mirror command copies and mirrors objects through a plane that is perpendicular to the work plane and passes through a line you specify.

Mirror the braces

1. 2.

Select the braces.

Copy special > Mirror.

3.

In the True plan view pick two points on gridline 4 to set the mirror line and click Copy.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

34

Create purlins
While still working in the true plan view we will create the purlins by using the Create beam tool.
Create purlins

1. 2. 3. 4.

Double-click on the Create beam icon. Load the PURLIN properties. Select a 300 /3.0 profile for the purlin. Z Change the Position / At depth to: Front with 5 mm offset and Apply.

5.

Pick the purlin work point near grid intersection F-1 at the command Pick first position.

The point that you pick for the purlin is red since it is not in the view plane. 6. At the command: Pick second point, pick the work point near grid intersection F-2.

7.

Check the elevation view on grid 1 to ensure that the purlin is orientated and positioned correctly.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

35

With asymmetric profiles (Z, L, etc) the picking order of the first and second position determines the orientation. It is not possible to change the orientation using the beam properties.

8.
Set the work plane back to global origin

Create the rest of the purlins by using the Copy > Translate command.

Now we must switch the work plane back to the global origin to carry on modeling outside of the roof plane. 1. 2. Select View > Work plane > Work plane Select Plane: XY and set the depth coordinate to 0 and click Change.

The work plane is now set back to the global origin.

Vertical bracing
Working in the elevation on the GRID C view we will create vertical bracing using the Create beam tool.
Create brace

1. 2. 3. 4.

Double-click on the Create beam icon. Load the BRACING_V properties. Enter RHS200*120*8 as the profile. Change the Position / At depth to: Front and add a 5 mm offset, click Apply.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

36

5.

Create one brace using the column top positions at C-1 and C-2.

6.

Move the brace 1300 mm downwards and to the middle of the column.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

37

Copy the brace along grid C Copy the braces to gridline F

1. 2. 3.

Select the brace and use Copy special > Translate to copy the brace five times at 6000 mm intervals along gridline C. Select all the braces on gridline C and select Copy special > Translate In the GRID 1 view, pick the outer corner of the column on gridline C as the first position.

4.

Pick the inner corner of the column on gridline F as the second position, click Copy.

Crane girders
Next we will add crane girders to the framing.
Create girder

1. 2. 3.

Double-click on the Create beam icon. Load the BEAM properties. Enter IPE450 for the profile size.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

38

4. 5. 6.

In the GRID 1 view, pick the grid intersection C-15500. Use the cursor to snap (do not pick! i n the y direction. ) ! With the keyboard type 930 for the numeric location and press Enter.

Copy girders

1. 2.

Copy the girder that you created to the other columns on gridline C. Use the Copy mirror command to copy the girders from gridline C to gridline F.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

39

The BasicModel2 model is now complete.

Save the model Save the model with a new name

Save the model. 1. 2. 3. Click File > Save as Check the path C:\TeklaStructuresModels, in the Save in field and type Model name BasicModelCombined. Press the OK button. The model has now been saved with the new name.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

40

5.5 Combine Models 1 and 2

Next we will combine BasicModel1 and BasicModelCombined by copying the objects in phase 1 from BasicModel1. To copy the objects from another model we will use the command; Copy from model. This command copies objects from specified phase(s) from another model. To be able to manage the objects from the two models after we have combined them we will first transfer the model 2 parts to a different phase. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings > Phases

Change the phase of BasicModel2 members, preparation

Check objects by phases

1.

Click Properties > Phase number... to open the Phase manager dialog box.

By default only Phase 1 appears in the dialog box. 2. 3. Select Phase 1. Click Objects by phases.

All the parts in the model become highlighted, indicating that they belong to Phase 1.
Add a new phase Model2

4. 5.

Click on the Add button to add a new phase. Edit the name of the new phase to Model 2.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

41

6. 7. 8. 9.

Also edit the name of the Phase 1 to Model 1. See that all of the parts are still highlighted in the Model 2 phase. Click Modify phase. Now all of the parts in the model have changed to Phase number 2.

In BasicModel1 the column footings on gridline B were dimensioned both for steel columns on gridline B and concrete columns on gridline C. After combining the models the footings on gridline C will no longer be needed and you can delete them.
Remove pad footings

Delete the pad footings on gridline C.

Edit > Copy from model

Since we did not edit the phases in BasicModel1 they all belong to phase number 1.
Copy from model

1. 2. 3. 4.

Click Edit > Copy special > From model... Select BasicModel1 as the model to copy from in the Model directories list. Enter 1 as the phase number from which to copy the objects. Click Copy.

The model 1 parts are now in the combined model.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

42

With the Copy special > From model command you are not able to import drawings with the model.

Change the Model 1 part properties and numbering series

The Model 1 parts were created without paying attention to part properties and they are not consistent with the Model 2 parts (color, name, numbering series, and material). The different numbering series and material would result in otherwise equal parts getting different numbers when numbering. In this combined model we want all of the parts to be numbered according to the numbering series shown in the table in the beginning of the lesson. To achieve this we will need to modify the Model 1 part properties so that they are consistent with the Model 2 parts. The properties of the connection parts to be created in the new model will be consistent with the existing ones since we used the same default Preferences in both models.
Change pad footing properties

1.

Select the Model 1 pad footings.

You can try the available select filters for selecting the footings. 2. 3. Load the FOOTING properties. Remove the modify switches and check only Name, Material, Class and Numbering series switches.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

43

4.
Change other parts properties

Click Modify.

By following the procedure above change the properties for: Beams Concrete beams Columns Concrete columns Slabs Hollow-core slabs Horizontal bracing Vertical bracing Silos.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

44

5.6 Define Your Own Select Filters

To make the selecting of parts easier in the future we will now define select filters for each part type. We will use the names of the part as filtering criteria. For steel/concrete beams and columns we will use the materials as additional filtering criteria to be able to filter them separately. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Filter > Select filter
Define select filter for footing

1.

Click on the Display select filter dialog icon to open the Select filter dialog box.

2. 3. 4.

Load the standard filter to turn out all the possible filtering. Enter the name FOOTING in the Name field of the Parts tab. Enter the name FOOTING in the Save as field and click Save as.

You can now select the new filter on the drop-down list.

By following the procedure above, define select filters for: Slabs Hollow-core slabs Horizontal bracing Vertical bracing Silos Rafters
Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

45

Purlins.
Define select filter for plates

To define select filters for plates created both manually and by the connections: 1. Enter the name *PLATE* in the Name field of the Parts tab. (*PLATE* matches every part whose name includes the word PLATE) 2. Enter the name PLATE in the Save as field and click Save as.

Define select filter for steel beams

To define select filters for steel beams: 1. 2. Enter the name BEAM in the Name field of the Parts tab. Enter S* in the Material field of the Parts tab. (S* matches every material whose material name begins with the character S) 3. Enter the name BEAM_STEEL in the Save as field and click Save as.

By following the procedure above define select filters for: Concrete beams Steel columns Concrete columns.

Create your own select filters to use both for modeling and for automating drawing creation with the help of wizards.

The Copy from model command only copies the objects from another model (not e.g. attributes from the model folder). We will now bring the attributes created in BasicModel 1 to BasicModelCombined.
Bring the BasicModel1 attributes

1. 2. 3.

Tools > Open model folder.

Browse to model BasicModel1 > Attributes.

Copy the files.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

46

4. 5.

Browse to BasicModelCombined > Attributes.

Paste.

Save the model

Finally save the model.

Copyright 2006 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Basic Modeling 2

47

Profiles and Materials

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training March 17, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Profiles and Materials ..................................................................................................3

6.1 6.2 6.3 Create Your Own Parametric Profile .........................................................................................4 Manage Library Profiles...........................................................................................................17 Add a New Material .................................................................................................................21

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents

Profiles and Materials

In this lesson

This lesson explains how to view and modify the catalogs. You will learn how to create a new parametric profile with the sketching tool, how to add a profile to the library profiles and how to group library profiles with rules. After updating the profile catalog we will use the new profile in the model to create the crane beams.

In this lesson you will also learn how to add a new material type and a new grade to the material catalog. We will use this new defined material for the silos in the model.
Introduction

Catalogs are databases containing detailed information about profiles, materials and bolts, which are available for use in your project. For example, the bolt catalog contains a library of standard bolts and bolt assemblies used in structural steelwork. Catalogs can also contain project or company-specific information. Catalogs can also be imported and exported. See more in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > Things you should know See more for profile import and export in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs >
The profile catalog > Merging profile catalogs.

See more about material catalogs in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The
material catalog.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

6.1 Create Your Own Parametric Profile

In this exercise we will define a new cross section to be used for a crane beam. We will create the crane beam as a parametric profile using the Tekla Structures cross section sketch editor.

Sketch a cross section

We are going to open the Cross section sketch editor and then sketch a rough outline of the shape shown above. It doesn matter if the lines are exactly horizontal or t vertical, or if they touch at the ends. Neither the dimensions are important at this stage. We will connect the ends of the poly-line and force the lines to be horizontal or vertical later.
Open sketch editor

1. Select Sketch parametric cross section from File > Catalog > Profiles > Sketch parametric cross section to open the sketch editor. The sketch editor opens showing the sketch editor view with toolbar, Variables dialog box and Sketch browser.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

Sketch a cross section

1. Click on the Sketch polyline icon.

2. Sketch the profile shown below and click the middle mouse button.

The yellow circles represent "chamfers" in the sketch editor.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

3. Click on the Coincident constraint icon.

4. Pick the ends of the lines one by to connect the ends

Force the lines to horizontal / vertical

1. Click on the Horizontal constraint icon.

2. Select all the lines you want to be horizontal. 3. Click on the Vertical constraint icon.

4. Select all the lines you want to be vertical.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

Add dimension constraints to the cross section

We will now add the needed dimension parameters to the cross section. Some of the dimension parameters in the parametric profile (the red ones in the figure below) will be user definable and some (the black ones) will be tied to the user definable parameters with equations.

Add horizontal dimensions

1. Click on the Sketch horizontal distance icon.

2. Select 2 points (shown in red) and then the dimension line position. A dimension is then added and a variable is added to the variables table.

3. Repeat adding dimensions for the edge fold thicknesses (b2, b3) and the web thickness (b4).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

4. In the variables table, change parameter b3 to be = b2. B3 is then automatically hidden.

5. Add a dimension b5 as shown.

Take care not to add too many dimensions to the profile or the constraints will work against each other.

6. In the variables table, change parameter b5 to be9 7.

This will result the upper flange to be horizontally symmetrical

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

8. Add a dimension to the lower flange width and to the left cantilever.

9. Add the equation =(b6-b4)/2 to the cantilever. This will result in the left and right cantilevers being symmetrical.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

Add vertical dimensions:

1. Click on the Sketch vertical distance icon.

2. Add a dimension for the profile height.

3. Add dimensions for edge fold heights.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

10

4. Add the equation h3 =h2.

5. Add dimensions for the upper flange thicknesses.

6. Add the equation h5 =h4

7. Add dimensions for the lower flange thicknesses.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

11

8. Add equation h8=h7 Now the profile is symmetric.

Edit the labels

1. Select Show for Visibility for the variables that can be user defined. Edit the labels of the shown parameters.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

12

2. Save the profile.

3. Type the prefix "CRANE" into the User profile cross section dialog box.

4. Click OK. 5. Close the profile.

6. Reply No to the question about saving the sketch. The parametric profile is now ready to be used in the profile catalog.

Modify the parametric profile edit chamfers

We will next complete the cross section shape by modifying two inner corners of the crane beam profile, which require a radius.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

13

Reopen the profile for editing

1. Open the component catalog (Ctrl + f) and select the category Sketches or select File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify sketched parametric cross section to access the profile you created in the catalog.

2. Double-click on the sketch CRANE that you just created.

Add rounding to the contour plate corners

3. Add chamfers to the profile: double-click on a circle highlighted in red, select curved chamfer type, and enter radius values as shown, Modify. See more about chamfers in Tekla Structures Help: Modeling > Detailing > Detailing commands > Chamfer.

4. Repeat editing the chamfer in the other highlighted corner. 5. Close and save the sketch.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

14

6. Click Yes to update the existing profiles in the model.

Test the parametric profile

1. Double-click on the Create beam icon. Tekla Structures opens the Beam properties dialog. 2. Click on the Select button on the right side of the Profile field. The Select profile dialog opens. 3. Select Parametric profile as the category and User-defined, parametric as the profile type. 4. On the Profile subtype list, select the CRANE profile that you just created. 5. Create a beam to the model and test the profile with different parameters.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

15

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

16

6.2 Manage Library Profiles

Add an instance of a parametric profile to the profile library

In case you often need to use specific size parametric profiles, it might be a good idea to add them as standard (fixed) profiles to the profile catalog. The dimensions of a library profile are fixed and can be changed only in the Modify profile catalog dialog box. This makes it faster and easier to select the necessary profile and also reduces the risk of incorrect user-defined parameters. See more information about the profile catalog in Tekla Structures help System > Catalogs > The profile catalog.
Add profile

1. Select File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify on the menu to open the Modify profile catalog dialog box. 2. Right-click in the tree structure and select Add profile. A new profile will be created with the name PROFILE (number).

Set profile properties

3. Change the profile name to CRANE400. 4. Choose the Profile type, User defined, parametric from pull-down list and the Profile subtype CRANE. 5. Enter dimensions for the profile as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

17

6. Click Update to insert the values to the profile.

You could now easily continue adding crane profiles of any other sizes (Crane 500, Crane 600, etc.) to the library.

7. Click OK to save the values. 8. Click OK to Confirm the save of the profile to the model folder

The profile can now be found among the library profiles and is ready for use.

Add a rule to the profile catalog

In the profile catalog, the library profiles are grouped according to rules such as profile type (e.g. I profiles) and profile sub-type (e.g. HEA). We will now add a rule for the CRANE profiles in the profile catalog. See more about rules in Tekla Structures Help: System > Catalogs > The profile catalog > Working with rules.
Add a rule

1. Select File > Catalog > Profiles > Modify on the menu. 2. Right-click on the profile tree dialog and select Add rule.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

18

3. Type in the Rule name: CRANE profiles. 4. As the Profile type, to which the rule will be applied, select All profiles. 5. As the Name filter string, type "CRANE*". See more about filters in Tekla Structures System > Catalogs > Things you should know > The filter.

As a default, the wildcard symbol (*) is entered, meaning "all entries". To group all catalog entries with names beginning with A, enter A* as the Name filter string. To group all catalog entries with names containing 100, enter *100*. The characters * and ? can also be used in object names. If the object name you want to filter contains * or ?, enclose * or ?in square brackets. E.g., to find the profile P100*10, enter P100[ 10 in the filter field. *] 6. Click OK to save the rule and close the dialog.

7. Confirm to save the profile to the model folder.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

19

Use the profile in the model

Create the beams

1. Double-click on the Create beam icon and select the profile CRANE400. 2. Create one crane beam from gridline 1 to 4. Start at the outer edge of the supporting beam on gridline 1, and end at the middle of the supporting beam on gridline 4.

3. Set the position in plane and position in depth fields to position the beam as shown. To get the right offset for the "on plane position", use the measuring tool!

4. Select the crane beam and make a copy of it to go from gridline 4 to gridline 7. 5. Select both crane beams and copy them to the other side of the building on gridline C.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

20

We now have crane beams on both sides of the building.

6.3 Add a New Material

We will next add a new material to the Material catalog. See more about the material catalog in Tekla Structures help System > Catalogs > The material catalog.

Add a new material type

We will first create a new material type under which the new material will be created.
Open the material catalog

Select File > Catalog > Materials > Modify on the menu to open the Modify material catalog dialog.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

21

Create a new material type

If the material type you need is missing from the tree, you can create a new one. 1. Right-click on a material branch in the tree and select Add miscellaneous branch.

Add a new material

We will next add a zero-weight material under the miscellaneous branch and use it for the silos in the model.
Create a new material grade

2. Right-click on the Miscellaneous branch in the tree and select Add grade.

3. Type Zero_weight for the material name in the tree.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

22

4. Add the material's density 0.00 for profiles and plates. 5. Save the new material type and grade by clicking OK. We will next use the new zero-weight material for the silos in order to exclude the silos from the total weight of the model.
Change material of the silos

Select the two silos in the model and double-click on one of them while holding the Shift button down to open the properties dialog. 1. Select Zero_weight material from Select material list. 2. Close Select material dialog by clicking OK. 3. Click on the Modify button in the Column properties dialog to change the material of the silos.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

23

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Profiles and Materials

24

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing

Tekla Structures 11.0 August 30, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

ii

Contents

Concrete Detailing....................................................................................................... 2
8.1 8.2 8.3 Connecting Concrete Members Using Connections and Macros...............................................3 Creating Stairwell ....................................................................................................................12 Using Pre-cast Concrete Custom Components .......................................................................23

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

7 Applied Precast Concrete Detailing

In this lesson

This lesson explains how to modify and finalize concrete members in Tekla Structures. You will also learn how to use custom components to create concrete members and to connect them. Concrete detailing can be done manually or by using system connections or custom components, which help you to automate the detailing. See more about concrete detailing in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Reinforcement > Concrete detailing and about connections in Help: Detailing > Getting Started > Basics > Connection concepts. For fully automatic connection creation, you can use the AutoConnection functionality to select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts. Use AutoConnection to have Tekla Structures automatically create similar connections for similar framing conditions. See more about AutoConnections in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Getting Started > AutoConnection > Using AutoConnection.

Introduction

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

7.1 Connecting Concrete Members Using Connections and Macros

In this exercise we will use system connections to connect the concrete beams and columns and to fit the hollow-core slabs to the steel beams. You can create connection macros either by using AutoConnections or manually. See more about connections in Tekla Structures Help: Detailing > Getting Started > Basics > Connection concepts and about AutoConnections in Help: Detailing > Getting Started > AutoConnection > Using AutoConnection.
AutoConnections is the recommended way to create connections. Use AutoConnections to

automatically select and apply connections with predefined properties to selected parts.

Create corbels using AutoConnections and AutoDefaults

With AutoConnection you can define groups of rules which Tekla Structures automatically applies when you use AutoConnection to create connections in a model.
Define conditions for AutoConnections

There are six basic cases for AutoConnections:

For each of these it is possible to define several framing conditions. We will now define two different conditions, which check the material and number of secondaries for corbel connections. The first condition will use the Corbel connection (14), if only one beam is to be connected. For two beams we will use the Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection. 1. 2. Open the AutoConnection setup dialog by selecting AutoConnection from Setup pull down menu. Right-click on the Beam to column web rule group and select Create additional rule sets. Tekla Structures creates a New rule set under the Beam to column web rule group. Open the Beam to column web rule group and right-click on the New rule set and select Edit rule set from the popup list. Change the Rule set name to describe the use (Concrete Column). Select Primary material name and Secondary 1 material name from the Available rules list and move them to the right by clicking the arrow in the middle of the dialog.

3. 4. 5.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

6. 7. 8.

Write K* in the Exact value field for both rules. Add a new rule Number of secondaries by selecting it from the Available rules list and clicking the arrow. Set the Exact value to 1.

9.

Click OK to close the dialog and save the rule settings.

10. We will next define which connection this rule will use. Open the Concrete Column rule set and right-click on the No connection icon to select the Corbel connection (14). Now pick Select connection type, which opens the Select component dialog. 11. In the Select component dialog select Corbel connection (14). Close the dialog by clicking OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

12. You have now completed one rule definition. Next, copy the rule set to apply also for the Beam to column flange condition by right-clicking on the Concrete Column rule set and selecting Copy rule set from the popup menu. 13. Open the Beam to column flange rule group and right-click on any rule set and select Paste rule set from the popup menu.

You have now defined the beam to column connection for concrete members always to be
Corbel connection (14) if the number of secondaries is 1.

14. Next, create another rule set for the Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection in case there are two beams to be connected to a column. Repeat steps 2 Rule name is: Concrete column (2 sec) 8. 15. Set the Exact value of "Number of secondaries" to 2. 16. Add a new rule Secondary 2 material name by selecting it from the Available rules list and clicking the arrow. 17. Write K* to Exact value field.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

18. Click OK to close the dialog and save the rule settings. 19. Move the rule set above the Concrete column rule set using right button command Move up. The rules are read from the list in appearance order and the first valid rule will be used. 20. Open the Concrete column (2 sec) rule set and right-click on the No connection icon to select the Two sided seating with dowel (76). Now pick Select connection type, which opens Select component dialog. 21. In Select component dialog select Two sided seating with dowel (76). Close the dialog by clicking OK. 22. Next copy the rule set to apply also in Beam to column flange condition by right-clicking on Concrete column (2 sec) rule set and selecting Copy rule set from popup menu. 23. Open the Beam to column flange rule group and right-click on any rule set and select Paste rule set from popup menu.

24. Click OK to close the dialog and save the rule settings.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

Define AutoDefaults

With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different pre-defined connection properties. When the connections need to be modified (for example changing the beam size), Tekla Structures automatically redefines the connection properties using the AutoDefaults rules defined by you. See more in Help: System > AutoConnection > AutoDefaults setup > AutoDefaults setup. We will now create a new AutoDefaults rule group named Industrial building rules. This rule group could include all the rules needed to define when to use certain pre-defined connection properties for the entire project.

Create new rule group: Industrial building rules

1. 2. 3.

Click Setup > AutoDefaults to open the AutoDefaults setup dialog box. Right-click in the dialog and select New rule group, and a rule group named New appears. Select the New rule group, press the F2 key and type: Industrial building rules.

4.

Press OK to save the settings.

Create new rule sets for Two sided seating with dowel (76)

We will now create an AutoDefault rule for Two sided seating with dowel (76) and use it in the Industrial building rule group. 1. 2. Open the AutoDefaults setup dialog from Setup > AutoDefaults pull down menu. Browse to Two sided seating with dowel (76) under Industrial building rules group.

3. 4.

Right-click to create an additional rule set. Select the New rule set under Two sided seating with dowel (76) and select Edit rule set from the right-click popup menu.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

5. 6. 7.

Write a new name for the rule set: Corbels400-800. Select Primary depth from Available rules list and move it to the right using arrow button in the middle of the dialog. Set Minimum value to 400 and Maximum value to 800.

8. 9.

Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog. Select connection parameters Standard.j30000076 under the Corbels400-800 rule set and right-click > Additional connection parameters...

10. Select the new connection parameters and right-click > Edit connection parameters. The connection properties dialog opens. 11. On the General tab, select the Industrial building rules for the AutoDefault rule group; it can also be None.

12. On all the tabs, set the fields that you want AutoDefaults to override to Default by selecting the options marked with the arrow symbol. Set all needed options, values and dimensions on all tab pages as shown below:

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

13. Save the settings using Save as field, define the name Corbels400-800. 14. Close the dialog with OK. 15. Right-click on the connection parameters and pick Select connection parameters

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

16. Select Corbels400-800.j30000076 from Attribute File List.

17. Close the Attribute File List with OK. 18. Close the AutoDefaults setup dialog with OK.

Create connections

We will now use the AutoConnections and apply the AutoDefault rules which we just defined. 1. Select all concrete beams and columns between grid lines C and F.

2. 3.

From the Detailing pull down menu select AutoConnection Select the Industrial building rules group for connection parameters.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

10

4.

Click the Create connections button. Tekla Structures creates connections between concrete beams and columns using Corbel connection (14), which creates corbels and connects beams to columns if only one beam is to be connected. For two beams, Tekla Structures uses the Two sided seating with dowel (76) connection.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

11

7.2 Create a Stairwell

In this exercise we will create a stairwell and footings for it using a system macro and a custom component.

Create stairwell footings with the help of a custom component

Import the custom component

First, we need to import the needed custom component into the model. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Right-click > Import Select CastInPlaceCustomComponents300605.uel file in the browser. Click OK. The custom components are imported into the model and are ready for use.

Create the footings

The custom component will create a footing and supporting walls for the stairwell. Define first the values for the footing and the walls, then place them in the model. 1. 2. In the Component catalog, double-click on the CIP_FO_002 custom component to open the dialog. On the Footing tab, insert the values as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

12

3.

Set the values on the Walls tab. Note that the 2.2 walls will not be created and therefore the profile size is set to zero.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

13

4.

On the Position tab, set the Rotation to Back and the On plane and At depth fields to Middle position.

5. 6.

Close the dialog with OK. In the PLAN +0 view, zoom in to gridline A between lines 5 and 6.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

14

7. 8. 9.

Delete the 1800*1800 size footings below the columns on grid lines 5 and 6. Select the CIP_FO_002 custom component in the Component catalog. Pick the middle point between grid lines 5 and 6 on the line A.

The footing and the walls are created.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

15

Insert additional walls

We will next insert supporting wall panels on gridlines 5 and 6 between the columns and the side walls. 1. 2. Double-click on the Create concrete panel icon to open the dialog. Fill in the values as shown below:

3. 4.

Close the dialog by clicking the OK button. Pick the start and end points for each wall and close them with the middle mouse button.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

16

Insert a slab

Before creating the stairwell, we will insert a slab above the walls we just created. 1. 2. Double-click on the Create concrete slab icon to open the dialog. Set the slab height to be 300 mm, select K30-2 as the material and position it to be Front in depth with value 700.

3. 4. 5.

Close the dialog with the OK button. In the PLAN +0 view, pick the polygon position by clicking at the corner points. Close the polygon with the middle mouse button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

17

Create the stairwell using a macro

Define the stairwell settings

We will create the stairwell using the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) component. First we need to find the needed component. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Type "stair" in the search field. Click the Search button. All components having a word "stair" are listed. Double click the Stairwells and elevator shafts (90) component.

6.

Fill in the tab pages as shown below:

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

18

On the Plan View tab, define the levels and wall dimensions for 1st, typical and top floors.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

19

On the Openings tab, set the dimensions for doors.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

20

On the Stairs and landings tab, define the placement and dimensions for stairs. 7. 8. Close the dialog with the OK button. In the PLAN +0 view, pick, first, the intersection of gridline A and the column inner side on line 5, then the intersection of line A and the column inner side on line 6. The stairwell is created.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

21

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

22

7.3 Using Pre-cast Concrete Custom Components

In this exercise we will use pre-cast custom components for creating and connecting concrete members.

Insert a column shoe connection

Import the custom component

First, we need to import the needed custom component into the model. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Right-click > Import Select the file PrecastCustomComponents310505.uel in the browser. Click OK. The custom components are imported into the model and are ready for use. Double-click on the CO_CO_GR_02 custom component to open the dialog.

6.

Use the default the values as shown below.

7. 8.

Close the dialog with the OK button. Pick the footing of the stairwell.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

23

9.

Pick the column on gridline 5. The column shoes and anchor bolts are created.

10. Repeat for the column on line 6.

Create plinth walls and wall panels

Non-bearing plinth walls

For the plinth wall insulation we need first create a new material named "Stonewool" 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the Modify material catalog from File > Catalog > Materials > Modify Right-click over the Miscellaneous branch and select Add grade. Select the new material and press F2, then type Stonewool Set the profile and plate density values to be 250 kg/m3 Close the dialog with OK. Close also the Save confirmation dialog with OK.

We will now create non-bearing plinth walls on gridline A. First, we need to find the needed custom component in the component catalog. The component was imported together with the column footing connection (CO_CO_GR_02). 1. 2. 3. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Open the "Custom" folder Double-click on the EW_003 custom component to open the dialog.

4.

Fill in the fields on each tab page as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

24

On the Main part tab set the dimensions and materials.

Define the dimensions and spacing of the insulation boxes.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

25

Set the position to be Left on plane, Rotation to Top and Middle at depth. 5. 6. 7. Click OK to close the dialog and apply the settings. Pick the start point at the columns outer side mid point at line 7. Pick the end point at the columns outer side mid point at line 6. A plinth wall is created.

8.

Create similar plinth walls between gridlines 5 and 1 on gridline A, one wall between each column.

9.

Create similar plinth walls on gridline F, one wall between each column.

Bearing plinth walls

Next, we will create bearing plinth walls on gridlines 1 and 7. 1. 2. 3. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. In the Custom folder, double-click on the EW_004 custom component to open the dialog. Fill in the fields on each tab page as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

26

On the Main part tab set the dimensions and materials.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

27

Define the dimensions and spacing of the insulation boxes.

Set the position to be Left on plane, Rotation to Top and Middle at depth. 4. 5. Close the dialog with the OK button. Pick the start point on gridline C at the 900*600 column's long side mid point.

6.

Pick the end point on gridline A, perpendicular to the start point.

7. 8.

Create similar plinth walls between gridlines C and F. Repeat with reverse picking order at gridline 1. Note that you need to use reference pick with Ctrl button on grid line C at the 900*600 column's long side mid point, then pick the actual start point on gridline A, perpendicular to it.

Panels around the stairwell

Next, we will create outer panel with insulation around the outer part of the stairwell. 1. 2. 3. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. In the Custom folder, double-click on the EW_002 custom component. Fill in the fields on each tab page as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

28

On the Picture tab, define the dimensions and materials. Note that the thickness of the inner panel is zero. Set the position to be Left on plane, Rotation to Top and Middle at depth. 4. 5. Close the dialog with the OK button. Pick the start and end points at the corners around the stairwell's bearing walls.

We should now have plinth walls and wall panels around the whole building. Next, we will connect the walls to each other.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

29

Connect the walls using custom components

Outer corners

We will now create corner connections between the walls on the outer corners. 1. 2. 3. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Open the "Custom" folder Double-click on the EW_EW_GR_04 custom component to open the dialog.

4.

Fill in the fields as shown below.

5. 6. 7.

Close the dialog by clicking the OK button. oo m into the intersection of gridlines F and 7. Z Pick the parts of the walls as shown on the dialog's Picture tab. End with the middle mouse button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

30

The connection is created.

8. 9.

Use the component EW_EW_GR_06 for the corner at the intersection of gridlines 1 and F. Set the values on the Picture tab as in previous connection and put the up direction to z.

10. Repeat for gridline A outer corners. Use EW_EW_GR_04 at grid line 1 and EW_EW_GR_06 at grid line 7.
Corners around the stairwell

Next we will connect the walls around the stairwell.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

31

1. 2. 3.

Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Open the "Custom" folder Double click the EW_EW_GR_11 custom component to open the dialog.

4.

Fill in the fields as shown below.

5. 6.

Close the dialog with the OK button. Z om in to stairwell's inner corner on gridline 5 and pick the parts in order shown on the o dialog, end with the middle mouse button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

32

A connection is created. 7. Then go to the stairwell's inner corner on grid line 6 and make the connection using EW_EW_GR_12 custom component with Picture tab page values shown below. Use z up direction on General tab. Picking order is the same as in previous connection.

8.

Use the manual fitting tool to adjust the stairwell's outer corners on gridlines 5 and 6. Before fitting, switch the "Select objects in components" on. a. b. c. Select the "Create fitting" icon. Pick the panel to be fitted between grid lines 5 and 6. Point the fitting line with two points along joining parts' sides as shown in the first picture below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

33

d.

Repeat for the insulation.

e.

Continue with the panel on grid line 5 by picking it, then make a reference pick with Ctrl button down at the corner of the panel we just fitted. Point direction at the selected panel's corner and give a numerical value 15, then press Enter to get the start point for fitting line 15 mms from the panel's side.

f.

Pick the fitting line end point at the side of the insulation, perpendicular to the start point.

g.

Repeat for the opposite corner at grid line 6.

Connections straight sides

on

Now we will connect the parallel walls to each other. 1. 2. 3. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Open the "Custom" folder Double click the EW_EW_GR_15 custom component to open the dialog.

4.

Fill in the fields as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

34

5. 6. 7.

Close the dialog with the OK button. oo m in to column in the intersection of gridlines A and 2. Z Pick, first, the panels in the order shown on the dialog, then the column, and end with the middle mouse button.

The connection is created between the walls and the column. 8. 9. Repeat to all similar cases around the building at concrete columns. On gridline F, use the component EW_EW_GR_14 for connecting the walls beside the steel columns with settings shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

35

Connect double-T slabs using custom components

We will now connect the double-T slabs to each other using a seam-type custom component. 1. 2. 3. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Open the "Custom" folder Double-click on the DT_DT_GR_01 custom component to open the dialog.

4.

Fill in the fields as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

36

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Click OK to close the dialog and apply the settings. In the PLAN +7175 view, zoom in to the top right corner at gridline F between lines 5 and 7. Select the 50 mm thick slabs and hide them using right-click > Shift + hide. Pick the top most DT-slab (main part) then the next slab aside it (sec. part). Pick start and end points as shown below.

The connection is created.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

37

10. Select the connection in the model and copy it 8 times to y direction -2400 mm.

11. Then select all the double-T slab seam connections and copy them 2 times to x direction -12000 mms.

Now all the double-T slabs should be connected to each other.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

38

Create seam ring reinforcements using custom components

Next we will create seam ring reinforcements around the hollow core-slabs using custom components. 1. 2. 3. Open the Component catalog by pressing Ctrl + F or from the Tools > Find a component drop down menu. Open the "Custom" folder. Double-click on the BE_D_004_SeamRing custom component to open the dialog.

4.

Fill in the fields as shown below.

Set the dimensions of the in-situ concrete and the placing of the rebars.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

39

Define the seam ring reinforcement properties and placing. 5. 6. 7. Close the dialog with the OK button. Pick the beam on gridline 7 at level +3850. Pick the intersection point of gridlines B and 7 at the end of the beam.

The reinforcements and the in-situ beam are created. 8. 9. Select the component and copy it to the upper levels (3500 and 95500 mms up). Create similar reinforcement to grid line 4 at two lowest levels putting the first seam rebar at 800 mms from the start.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation Applied Precast Concrete Detailing TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

40

Applied Steel Detailing

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training February 10, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents..................................................................................................................................i

Applied Steel Detailing ................................................................................................3

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 AutoConnections .......................................................................................................................4 General about the Criteria for Creating Connections.................................................................6 Study the Connections Created.................................................................................................9 Create a New AutoConnection Rule Group.............................................................................13 Run AutoConnection ...............................................................................................................25 Create Steel Stairs ..................................................................................................................26 Create Stanchions ...................................................................................................................40 Create Railings........................................................................................................................43

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Contents

Applied Steel Detailing

In this lesson

In this chapter we will first create connections by using default AutoConnection / AutoDefault rules. We will get acquainted with the logic that defines how certain connections are created to certain positions according to the AutoConnection rules. We will then create new AutoConnection rules for this project, remove the existing connections and replace them using a new AutoConnection rule group. We will also study how AutoConnections react to changes in the model. We will then create steel stairs.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

1.1 AutoConnections
You can create connections either manually (as we did in lesson 2) or by using AutoConnections. Help: Getting started > Using components > Creating components Help: Getting started > AutoConnection > Using AutoConnection We recommend you to use AutoConnections for creating connections. When you use AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates connections using a predefined set of rules, or rule group. With AutoConnection, Tekla Structures automatically creates similar connections for similar framing conditions. When you are creating AutoConnections you can also choose which connection properties you want to use (AutoDefaults).

Run default AutoConnections

Delete connections

1. 2.

Create or open a pre-defined view where only steel members are visible. Select all the connections and delete them.

Create autoconnections

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select all the visible parts in the model. Select Detailing > AutoConnection... to display the AutoConnection dialog box. Select a default rule group Basic for AutoConnection. Select a default rule group Factory defaults for AutoDefaults. Click the Create connections button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

The connections are created.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

1.2 General about the Criteria for Creating Connections

The AutoConnection setup is a tree structure containing rules. To apply a particular connection, the conditions within the model have to match all the rules in the branch containing the connection. The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model.

Rule group
The first level in the tree is the rule group: a user-defined group of rules for different standards, projects, manufacturers or models. You can create connections using the predefined rule group in the AutoConnection setup dialog box (as we did above). The dialog opens when you select Setup > AutoConnection on the menu.

Framing conditions
The second level shows the six different predefined framing conditions in AutoConnection setup which you cannot change.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

Rule sets
Under each framing condition you can create rule sets to specify which connection to use for specific conditions within the model.

Each rule set can include several single rules to filter the cases.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

The name of the rule set is just a descriptive name that is displayed in the tree structure. The actual filtering is done according to criteria set in the rules.

Connections
Under each rule set you can select the connection to apply if the rule set criteria is met. It is also possible to define that in a certain case no connection is to be created.

The order of the rules in the tree is important. Tekla Structures uses the first rule that matches the conditions within the model, so you should place the most limiting rule highest in the tree, and the most generic, lowest.

You can change the priority of a rule set by right-clicking on the rule set and selecting Move Up or Move Down.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

1.3 Study the Connections Created

We will now study two "beam to beam web" connections created by the default rule group Basic.

End plate
Check rule set used

1.

Double-click on one of the straight beam to beam web connections around the silos. It appears to be End plate (144).

2.

From the Beam to beam web framing condition in the AutoConnection setup, check the names of the rule sets. No other rule set name (Round tube, RHS, CHS, Bracing) seems to match with the conditions in the model but the Default.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

3.

Right-click on the Default rule set and select Edit rule set... to open the AutoConnection Rules dialog box.

You can see that there are no rules defined in the right pane under Rules in rule set. Since the Default rule set does not have any rules defined, all the Beam to beam web framing conditions that don't match with any other rule sets will match with the Default rule set. This is also the case with our example.

Tube gusset
Check rule set used

1.

Double-click on one of the horizontal brazing connections on the gridline 1.

It appears to be a Tube gusset (20) connection. 2. From the Beam to beam web framing condition in the AutoConnection setup, check the names of the rule sets. In the tree we can see that the first rule set name that matches our example conditions is
RHS.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

10

3.

Right-click on the RHS rule set and Select Edit rule set....

The only rule it contains is Secondary 1 profile type = 8 (square pipe, see the table below). So the rules match and the connection Tube gusset (20) is created.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

11

4.

Close the AutoConnection Rules dialog box. We will also study the next rule set that could have matched the conditions.

5.

Right-click on the Bracing rule set and select Edit rule set....

We can see that the only rule is Secondary 1 Part name = BRAC*. So also the Bracing rule set matches the conditions in our example. However, since the RHS rule set comes before the Bracing rule set, RHS is used and connection 20 is created instead of connection 11.
Study other connections Delete the connections

Study some more connections in the model.

Finally, delete all the connections from the model.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

12

1.4 Create a New AutoConnection Rule Group

We will now create a new AutoConnection rule group for this project. We will create a rule group that automatically creates the connections created manually in Lesson 2, and, in addition, some connections needed for the Model2. In this exercise we will create the following rules for framing conditions:
Framing condition Beam to beam web Rule set name Purlin Bracing Default Beam to column web Two sided Rules in rule set Secondary1 part name = PURLIN Secondary1 profile type = 8 No rule Number of secondaries = 2 Secondary1 part name = BEAM Secondary2 part name = BEAM Secondary1 profile type = 8 No rule Secondary1 profile = IPE450 No rule Connection Cold rolled overlap (1) Tube gusset (20) Shear plate simple (146) Two sided end plate (142)

Bracing Default Beam to column flange Crane support Default

Tube gusset (20) End plate (144) Welded Column with stiffeners (128) End plate (144)

We will define rule sets for the following framing conditions: Beam to beam flange Beam splices Column splices since we do not have those connections in our model.

Create rule group "Industrial building connections"

Create new rule group

1. 2.

Click Setup >AutoConnection to open the AutoConnection setup dialog box. Right-click on the Basic rule group and select New rule group.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

13

A new rule group named New appears. 3. Select the New rule group, press the F2 key and edit the name to Industrial building connections.

Beam to beam web

We will start creating rule sets for the Beam to beam web framing condition. By default, the framing conditions do not have any rule sets defined, only the connection type No connection.
Create Default connection

Right-click on a connection No connection in the AutoConnection setup tree. 2.

Select connection type... to open the Connection Browser dialog box.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

14

3.

Select Shear plate simple (146) and click OK to update the tree.

The tree is updated.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

15

Rule for "Purlin" connections

We will now create additional rule sets to the Beam to beam web framing. 1. Right-click on Beam to beam web framing condition and select Create additional rule sets. Two rule sets, New and Default, appear. The connection we chose now appears under both rule sets New and Default.

2.

Right-click on the rule set New and select Edit rule set...

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

16

The AutoConnection Rules dialog box opens. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select a rule Secondary 1 part name from the Available rules list. Click on the right arrow button to move the selected rule into the list Rules in rule set. Write PURLIN as the Exact value for the rule. Define Purlin as the name for the rule set. Click OK and the tree is updated.

8.

Select the Cold rolled overlap connection for the Purlin rule set.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

17

Rule for "Bracing" connections

1. 2. 3.

Create an additional rule set to the Beam to beam web framing. Right-click on the New rule set created and select Edit rule set Add 8 as the value for the rule Secondary 1 profile type and name the rule Bracing, click OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

18

4.

Select the connection Tube gusset (20) for the Bracing rule.

5.

Click Apply in the AutoConnection setup dialog box to save the editing so far.

Test the rules

We will now do a simple test to make sure our new rule group works. 1. Select the parts of each conditions we have defined rules for (by using Ctrl).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

19

2. 3. 4. 5.

Select Detailing > AutoConnection Select the Industrial building connections rule group. Select Industrial building rules for connection parameters (the AutoDefaults file we created in lesson 2). Click Create connections.

6.

Check that a correct connection was created to each condition.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

20

Beam to column web

Default connection

Set End plate (144) as the default connection for the Beam to column web framing condition.

Two-sided end plate

1. 2.

Right-click on the Beam to column web framing condition and select Create additional rule sets. Right-click on the New Rule set and select Edit rule set...

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Edit the rule set to have the following rules: Number of secondaries: 2 Secondary 1 part name: BEAM Secondary 2 part name: BEAM Name the rule set Two-sided and click OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

21

8.

Select Two sided end plate (142) as the connection for the rule Two-sided.

Bracing

Instead of creating a new rule for bracing, we will now copy the existing Bracing rule from the Beam to beam web framing condition. 1. Copy the rule Bracing from the Beam to beam web framing.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

22

2.

Right-click on the first rule (Two-sided) in the Beam to column web framing condition and select Paste rule set.

Beam to column flange

Default connection

Set End plate (144) as the default connection for the Beam to column flange framing condition.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

23

Crane support

1. 2. 3.

Create additional rule sets. Right-click on the New rule set and select Edit rule set. Edit the rule set to have the rules Secondary 1 profile = IPE450.

4.

Select Welded column with stiffener (128) as the connection for the rule Crane girder.

5.

Click OK in the AutoConnection setup dialog box.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

24

1.5 Run AutoConnection

Create connections

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Select the whole model. Select Detailing > AutoConnection Select the Industrial building connections rule group. Select Industrial building rules for connection parameters (the AutoDefaults file we created in lesson 2). Click Create connections.

6.

Check that a correct connection was created to each condition.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

25

1.6 Create Steel Stairs

We will now create steel stairs from level 3850 to level 7350 in the location where we left out the hollow-core slabs in lesson 1. We will create the stairs by using the U pan (S71) component.

You can also create steel stairs with component Stairs (S82). The advantage of U Pan (S71) is the ability to use library profiles, parametric profiles and custom parts to create steps. Also the positioning of bolts is easier.

Create stairs with default properties

Hide or filter out unnecessary parts to make the view easier to work in. You will need to see only the level 3850 beam on gridline 5 and the level 7350 beam on gridline 6.

1.

Double-click on the U Pan (S71) component.

2.

Pick the first point on the reference axis of the gridline 5 beam 1050 mm from the end point.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

26

3.

Pick the second point (using ortho snap) on the reference axis of the gridline 6 beam.

The stairs appear, with default properties.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

27

4.

Create component basic views of the stairs.

Position the stairs

On the Parameters tab page, change the Position in plane to Middle.

Define the stringers and the steps

1. On the U pan tab page, choose the custom option shown in the figure. This enables the options to use any step profiles you want on the Parts tab page.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

28

2.

On the Parts tab page, find the parametric profile shown below for the steps and edit the parameters as shown.

3.

Edit U200 for the stringer profiles.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

29

The U Pan (S71) component can create steps from library profiles, parametric profiles or custom parts.

Set steps rotation

On the Parameters tab page, change the Steps rotation to Back.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

30

Position stairs according to steps and define landings

The definition points of the stairs refer to treads instead of stringers. We will now move the definition points of the stairs to position the steps according to the drawing details above.
Position the stairs according to first and last steps

1.

Select the stairs and then its lower handle.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

31

2.

Move the handle according to the detail shown above.

You can either create the stairs directly in the correct position or create them between two points and then adjust these definition points of the stairs later.

3.

Check the dimensions by using the measure tool in the front view.

4.

Move the upper handle according to the drawing detail in the same way.

Set nosing to zero

1.

In the component front view, measure the nosing distance.

2.

On the Picture tab page, edit the Nosing distance as shown to set the nosing to zero.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

32

Now the steps are positioned the way we wanted.

Define the landings

1. 2. 3.

Select the bottom landing type shown in the figure below. Edit the bottom flooring thickness to 200 according the detail drawing above. Edit the bottom landing length to 650 (the nosing distance 150 taken into account) according to the detail drawing above.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

33

4.

Check the dimensions in the model with the measure tool.

5.

Edit, in the same way, the top flooring thickness and top landing length. The result should be as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

34

Remove brackets, create and position the bolts

The U Pan (S71) component, by default, creates and connects supporting L profile brackets underneath the treads.

We will now remove the L-profile brackets and position the bolts straight to the step profile.

Remove brackets and position the bolts

1. 2. 3.

On the Bracket tab page, select the option No Brackets. Edit the horizontal bolt size to 12. Edit the bolt distances to position the bolts according to the drawing detail above.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

35

4. 5.

Check the dimension with the measure tool in the model. Save the properties used.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

36

Connect landings
We will now use the Seating (30) component to connect the landings to the beams with a plate welded to the landing and bolted to the beam.

Create seating connection

1. 2. .

Double-click on the component Seating (30) in the component catalog. Pick a beam and then a landing to create a connection with default properties.

3.

Edit the cut distance to 0.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

37

4. 5.

Edit the plate dimensions (width changes the value parallel to the main part). Write zero (0) in the stiffeners thickness fields to delete the stiffeners.

6.

Edit the bolt positions.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

38

Check the dimensions with the measure tool. Save the properties used.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

39

1.7 Create Stanchions

We are now going to create railings to our stairs. We will create stanchions separately on one stringer and the upper landing with the component Stanchions (S76) and then rails to the stanchions with the component Railings (S77).
Create stanchions

1.

Double-click on the component Stanchions (S76) in the component catalog.

2.

Pick the first position at the lower end of the stringer as shown.

3. 4. 5.

Pick the second position at the end of the upper landing. Pick the stringer (1) and then the upper landing (2) as objects. Click the middle mouse button to end the command.

The stanchions are now created.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

40

Adjust position and height of stanchions

1. 2. 3.

Edit the stanchion height to 1100. Edit the distance from the start point to the first stanchion to 100. Edit the distance from the end point to the last stanchion to 100.

Define stanchion profiles

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

41

1.

On the Parts tab page, edit all stanchion profiles to PD40*4.

2.

Save the properties used.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

42

1.8 Create Railings

We will now create railings to the stanchions that we just created. For this, we will use the Railings (S77) component. We will remove the closures that the component creates and instead simply weld the rail ends to the first and last stanchions.

Create the railings

1.

Double-click on the component Railings (S77) in the component catalog.

2.

Select the stanchion option Use first and last. This option allows you to select only one stanchion (instead of selecting each one by one).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

43

3. 4.

Select one of the stanchions. Click the middle mouse button to create the railings.

Remove closures

On the Picture tab page, edit the distances from the closures to the nearest stanchion to 0.

Define rail profiles

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

44

1. 2. 3. 4.

Edit profile 1 to PD40*3 and profile 2 to PD20*3. Edit the top and bottom rail profile to 1 (number 1 refers to the profile defined in field 1). Edit the bottom rail profile to 0 in order not create it at all. Edit the middle rail profiles 2 2 2 in order to create three rails of profile 2.

Define middle rail distances

1.

On the Picture tab page, edit the middle railing offset to -30.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

45

2. 3.

On the Middle Rails tab page, edit the distances between the rails according to the above drawing. Select the option to end the middle railings at the stanchion outer edge level.

4.

Check the dimensions with the measure tool.

5.
Create railings to the other side

Save the properties used.

Using the saved properties, repeat the creation of the railings to the stringer and upper landing on the other side. 1. 2. 3. Create stanchions. Create railings. Edit the offset of the middle railings from -30 to 30.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

46

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BAISC TRAINING Applied Steel Detailing

47

Numbering and Reports

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training August 18, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Numbering and Reports.............................................................................................. 3

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 Numbering Basics .....................................................................................................................3 Number the Model .....................................................................................................................5 Check the Numbering, Create Reports......................................................................................7 Change Numbering Settings....................................................................................................13 Change Numbering Series ......................................................................................................15 Start Numbering from Scratch .................................................................................................18 Create Reports and Check Part Marks ....................................................................................20

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

Numbering and Reports

In this lesson

This lesson introduces the principles of numbering the model in Tekla Structures. You will learn: The options available for numbering your model How marks are assigned in numbering How to check part marks To use report templates.

8.1 Numbering Basics

Defining numbers to be used for parts
You use numbering series to divide part, assembly and cast unit numbers into groups. For example, you can allocate separate numbering series to different part types (BEAM, COLUMN, BRACING, etc.) or according to which floor the part is located in (1st floor, 2nd floor, etc.). You can name the numbering series to which a part, an assembly or a cast unit belongs, using the part properties dialog box. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a starting number. Part Position and Assembly Position numbers are material specific and apply only to steel by default. Concrete members have part prefix "Concrete", and the starting number is 1 and they have a Cast Unit Position number instead of an Assembly Position number. See more in Help: Modeling >
Parts > Numbering parts > Defining numbers to be used for parts.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

Running the numbering

When you initiate the numbering process, Tekla Structures assigns marks to parts, assemblies and cast units. You run the numbering by selecting Tools > Numbering > Modified or Tools > Numbering > Full. The Full option will check all parts in the model even if they have not been modified. The Modified option only checks the new and modified parts and is much faster.
Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Tools>Numbering>Modified Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference > Tools>Numbering>Full

How marks are assigned in numbering

In numbering, parts with the same Part prefix and Start number will be compared with each other. All identical parts within such a group will be given the same number. The prefix and start number together define what numbers the part will be given. E.g. if the prefix is PC and the starting number is 1 (steel columns in our model), the numbering result will be PC1, PC2, PC3, etc.
Help: Modeling > Parts > Numbering parts > What affects numbering

Numbering settings
Numbering is carried out according to the settings in the Numbering setup dialog box. In the Numbering setup dialog you can define how new or modified parts are handled in numbering. For example, you decide whether a profile name affects the part number, and define the degree of tolerance in comparing the parts in numbering.
Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Numbering > Numbering settings

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

8.2 Number the Model

In lesson 5 (Basic Modeling 2) we defined the numbering series for the members in our model. Thus, the members already have the numbering series information but not the actual marks. If we try to create a report or a drawing, there will be a warning about the numbering not being up to date.

We will use Inquire object to see the current state of the numbering of parts and then we will number the model.
Inquire a part

1. Select Inquire > Object 2. Select any steel column. The Inquire object dialog box opens. The Part position and Assembly position marks are shown as PC/0 and AC/0 so the numbers shown are 1 less than the starting numbers defined for the column (PC/1 and AC/1). This indicates that the part and assembly have not been numbered yet.

Tekla Structures uses numbers to identify parts, assemblies and cast units when producing drawings and reports. You must have Tekla Structures number the model parts before you can create drawings or reports.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

Run full numbering

Select Tools > Numbering > Full from the pull-down menu. Now all the parts, assemblies and cast units in our model have up to date position numbers.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

8.3 Check the Numbering, Create Reports

We will now check the marks assigned to parts, assemblies and cast units.
Inquire part

1. Select Inquire > Object 2. Select any column. The Inquire object dialog box opens. Now the steel columns have Part position and Assembly position numbers and the concrete columns have cast unit numbers (the position numbers may differ in your model).

The numbering is now up to date and we can create reports. We will next create an assembly part list and a cast unit list of the whole model.
Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing reports > Producing reports on entire model

You can create reports already at an early stage of the project to check the model and get pre-bill of material lists at quotation stage, cut lists, bolt lists, weld lists etc.
Create assembly part list and cast unit list

1. Click on the Report icon to display the Report dialog box.

2. Select Assembly_part_list report template from the list.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

3. On the Options tab, check the options as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

4. Click Create from all to run a report of the entire model. The report is now automatically displayed in a dialog. Also the text file is created in the model folder.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

5. Check the numbering range of the assemblies and parts. 6. Repeat the procedure above to create a cast unit list of the entire model. We will next create a cast unit list of all concrete columns in our model. We will name the report with a specific name in order to keep the information on the stage of the project. To keep the report files you have created, give them a specific name. If you try to create a report with the existing name, Tekla Structures asks before it overwrites the existing report.

Create cast unit list of concrete columns

1. Use select filter COLUMN_CONCRETE to select all concrete columns. 2. In the Report dialog box, edit report file name to read: cast_unit_list_COLUMN_02_02_04.xsr. (Next time you create the cast unit list of columns just change the date)

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

10

3. Click Create from selected. 4. The report is now displayed in a dialog box. 5. Select Tools > Open model folder to check that the actual text file appears in the model folder. Tekla Structures stores a full numbering history in the file: numbering.history. The file contains the following model numbering details: User who carried out the numbering and the date Numbering Full / Modified Numbering settings used A list of defined numbering series Information on the parts, assemblies and cast units numbered
Study the numbering history log

1. Select Tools > Display log file > Numbering history log This displays the numbering history in a dialog box. 2. For more information on the log file, see help file Help: System > Files and folders > Log files > Numbering history log.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

11

When you select a list entry that contains the ID numbers of the parts or the assembly, Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

12

8.4 Change Numbering Settings

You may come across a situation in the middle of the project when you need to change the numbering settings. For example, if some parts have already been ordered from the workshop, you may need to have different part marks for additional parts even if they are the same as the existing ones. We will now choose the numbering setup option Take new number for new parts. As an example, we create some new parts to demonstrate the new numbering setup. Changing the numbering settings in the middle of the project can be dangerous. In a case where you absolutely need to change the settings in the middle of the project, make sure you understand how the changes will affect the part marks.
Copy beams and columns

1. Select the Model 1 beams and columns on gridline 7. 2. Copy them twice 6000 mm in the x direction.

Change numbering settings

3. On the menu, select: Setup > Numbering 4. In the New: field, choose the option Take new number, and click Apply.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

13

Number the model

On the menu, select: Tools > Numbering > Full. Always carry out a full numbering on the model after you have changed the numbering settings.

Inquire the result

1. Use the Inquire object command to compare the marks of corresponding old and new parts. 2. Study the changes in the numbering history log (the position numbers in your model may differ from the example below).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

14

8.5 Change Numbering Series

By defining a numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) we can group parts, assemblies and cast units the way we want. This way we can allocate parts in a certain area of a building to a particular numbering series. We will now change the numbering series of the outermost frame that we copied by changing the start numbers from 1 to 1000. We will then change the numbering series of the end plates in the frame to 2001 by using the connection dialog box (which will overwrite the position number defined in the preferences dialog box).

Change the numbering series

1. Select the columns on the outermost frame. 2. Modify the numbering series (and only the numbering series) of the columns as shown.

3. Select the beams on the outermost frame. 4. Modify the numbering series of the beams as shown.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

15

When planning numbering, ensure that you reserve enough numbers for each series. If one series overflows into another, Tekla Structures might allocate the same number to different parts. Tekla Structures will warn you about series overlaps. View the numbering history log to check which numbers overlap.
Change numbering series of the connection members

1. Open the End plate 144 dialog box. 2. On the Plates tab, edit the End plate position number to 2001. 3. Modify all the end plate connections of the frame with only the Pos. No field checked.

Number the model

On the menu, select Tools > Numbering > Full. Always carry out full numbering on the model after you have changed numbering series.

Inquire the numbers

1. Use the Inquire object command to compare the marks of corresponding old and new parts

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

16

2. Study the changes in the numbering history log. We will now delete the parts created in this lesson.
Delete the frames

Delete the two frames created in this lesson.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

17

8.6 Start Numbering from Scratch

After trying different numbering options (changing numbering settings and numbering series) there is a possibility that some earlier unwanted position numbers will remain. There may also be gaps in position numbers. Before you start creating drawings to issue, it is reasonable to start the numbering from scratch. This method will ensure that each part in the model will really get the position numbers according to the updated numbering series defined for them and no previous, unwanted numbers will be left.
Clear numbers of all parts Renumber all

1. Select all the parts in the model. 2. On the menu, select: Tools > Numbering > Clear selected. 3. Check-mark the option Renumber all in the Numbering setup dialog box.

4. Select Tools > Numbering > Full. By using the Unnumber selected command or Renumber all setting you will loose all information about previous numbers. These settings can be safely used only at the beginning of a project.
Set the numbering settings for the project

5. Finally, set the numbering setup the way you want the numbering to be carried out in the project.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

18

6. Click OK. 7. On the menu, select: Setup > Save defaults. You must save the Numbering setup for the model with the command Setup > Save Defaults to restore the options by default when you open the model.

Use Setup > Load defaults command to see the saved Numbering setup options. It is recommended that you normally use Modified numbering. In these cases, Full numbering should be run instead of Modified numbering: when performing the first numbering after the numbering settings have been changed when Standard part option is used when Pop-marks are used in DSTV files.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

19

8.7 Create Reports and Check Part Marks

Tekla Structures can produce many different reports from the information contained in the model. Study the available reports. You can also print the report with the Print option.

Check reports
Create the following reports and check the model: Part_list Check the plate thicknesses f or abnormalities Part_list Check the numbering range Part_list Check zero lengths of m aterial Part_list Check the steel grades Assembly_list Check the num bering range for steel assemblies Assembly_part_list Check the main item profile (plates or flats may indicate incorrect welding) Cast_Sequence_list Check the num bering range Cast_list Check the mai n item profile
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

20

Material_list Check that the grades that are used are correct Rebar_schedule_FIN Check the numbers and t ypes of rebars

Other checks
Here are some other ways to check your model: Clash-check the entire model Check the erectability of precast members Use the view or select filter to ensure that beams are called BEAM, columns are called COLUMN etc. Check the existence of marks on a marking plan and check that the updating of marks is done Check that the Title block information on each drawing is correct.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Numbering and Reports

21

Template Editor

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training March 16, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents ................................................................................................................................. i

Template Editor ........................................................................................................... 3

1.1 Create a New Template from Scratch........................................................................................3 Define template properties.........................................................................................................4 Insert template components and objects ...................................................................................5 Edit component properties.......................................................................................................14 Convert old Templates to new Format.....................................................................................16 Convert assembly_part_list.tpl template ..................................................................................16 Edit the template components .................................................................................................18 Edit template objects ...............................................................................................................19 Fit template components by the objects ..................................................................................22 Convert assembly_bolt_list.tpl template ..................................................................................22 Convert an AutoCAD File Into a Template...............................................................................25 Create a drawing title and revision templates ..........................................................................25 Insert the AutoCAD file and edit its contents ...........................................................................25 Break the template into two separate templates......................................................................29 Create a "bill of materials" template.........................................................................................31

1.2

1.3

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

Template Editor

In this lesson

You will learn how to work with Template Editor. You will create a new textual template from scratch. You will also create two graphical ones one by converting an old template and one by converting an AutoCAD block into a new template. There are links to help files in the text. It is recommended to read the help file for more detailed descriptions.

What are templates?

Templates are descriptions of forms and tables which can be included in Tekla Structures. The forms can be graphical to be included in drawings as tables, text blocks, drawing headers, or ASCII text form to be used as reports. The contents of the template fields are filled in by Tekla Structures using the templates at run time. Templates are created and edited with Template Editor, which is a separate application in Tekla Structures and can be run also standalone.

1.1 Create a New Template from Scratch

Start the Template Editor

Template Editor can be opened in Tekla Structures Tools > Templates drop-down menu both in modeling and drawing editors or, in the drawing editor, by clicking on the corresponding icon "Run template editor".

Create a new template

1.

We will first create a textual template to be used in report creation, which will list bolts, washers and nuts belonging to parts in an assembly. Create a new template by clicking on the New icon, or by selecting New from the File menu, or by typing Ctrl + N.

2.

Select "Textual template" as the template type.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

3.

Click OK. A new empty template is created.

Define template properties

Template properties define the size, margins and column usage of the output template. Read more about template page settings in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with templates > Editing template properties > Edit page and margin settings 1. Double-click in an empty area in the template window to open the Template Page Properties dialog.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Set the Width to be 80 characters and the Height to be 40 characters. Define View height to be 30 characters. Click OK. Select Options > Preferences from drop-down menu. Read more about preferences settings in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Menu Reference > Options menu commands > Preferences Select Millimeters as graphical units.

6.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

7.

Click OK.

Now, let's save the template.

Save the template

1. 2.

Select File > Save as . Browse to the Template folder and save the template file with the name Assembly_part_bolt_list.rpt.

Insert template components and objects

The template layout is designed with template components. Template objects are then placed inside template components to add either graphical or textual data. The properties of components, objects and the template itself determine the final appearance. Read more about template components in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template components . In this example template we need the components header, page header, 5 rows, page part bolt washer list. nut footer and footer to form an assembly

Insert template components

1.

Insert the template header and page header components by clicking on the "Header" and "Page header" icons on the Component toolbar.

2.

Insert the row components. For each row, after clicking on the "Row" icon in the Component toolbar, select the content type (assembly, part, bolt, ) from the dropdown list and click OK.

Each row usually represents an object from the Tekla Structures database. The content type defines what kind of data can be read into the row. Only the object specific attributes are available for each content type.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

3.

Insert the template page footer and footer components by clicking on the Page footer and Footer icons on the Component toolbar.

The components appear in the template work area and are listed in the content browser on the left.

Edit the template components

1.

Next, give a descriptive name for the rows - Steel_assembly, Part, Bolt, Washer, Nut by selecting the row in the content browser and typing the name.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

2.

Then, define the hierarchy for the rows according to the actual hierarchy in the model. In the model, the bolts, washers and nuts are attached to parts, which in turn form an assembly. Read more about the hierarchy of template components in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template components > Working with rows > Use row hierarchy .

Select the Part row and click on the Shift row down a level button in the content browser.

3.

Then shift the Bolt, Washer and Nut rows below the Part row by selecting the row and clicking twice on the shift button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

The whole hierarchical structure is needed for collecting the data from the model. For example, bolt data cannot be collected directly under assembly a part row is needed in between. Each row has an option "Hide in output" in case you do not want the row contents to be visible in the final printout.

Insert objects into header

Next, insert the template objects inside the components. In textual templates you can only use text strings and value fields. Read more about template objects in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects 1. First, insert text into the header by selecting Text in the Insert drop-down menu or by clicking on the corresponding A icon and typing the text in the Enter text dialog.

2.

Click OK and place the text in the header.

3.

Next put a value field next to the text by selecting Value Field in the Insert drop-down menu or by clicking on the corresponding Value Field icon and then point the position. Read more about value fields in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > Value fields.

The Select Attribute dialog opens. 4. Select the NAME attribute under the Project branch and click OK. Click on the + boxes on the left in the tree structure to open the sub-rows.

5.

Double-click on the value field and type a descriptive name for the value field in the
Value Field Properties dialog's Name field.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

6.

Add DATE and TIME value fields and corresponding texts to the right end of the header. The objects also appear in the content browser.

You can open several templates simultaneously and copy-paste objects from one template to another. The Value Field Properties dialog can be opened also by double-clicking on the field name inside the content browser.

7.

Select the DATE and TIME value fields and align them using the right mouse button command Align > Rights.

Insert objects into page header

Insert texts into the Page Header according to the example below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

Insert objects into rows

Insert and align texts and value fields into the rows as shown below. In the Value Field Properties dialog, click on the Attribute button to open the Select attribute dialog and then pick the attributes and give descriptive names to the value fields that appear in the content browser. Read more about attribute descriptions in Tekla Structures Help: System > Appendix D: Template fields.

Note: the Value Field names must be unique in every row. For example, if

you use the attribute NUMBER in different rows you should give a different name in the Value Field Properties dialog for each value field: NUMBER_of_assemblies, NUMBER_of_parts, etc.

Insert objects into page footer

Insert texts and a value field "PAGE" into the Page Footer according to the example below.

Insert objects into footer

1.

Insert texts into the Footer according to the example below.

Between the texts, add a value field which counts the total number of assemblies. Copy (Ctrl + C) the name of the value field to be counted from the content browser and open the Value Field Properties dialog.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

10

2.

Type the name for the value field and set the data type to be "Number".

3.

Click on the Formula button to open the Formula Contents dialog.

4.

Select Total from the Value Field Function drop-down menu.

5.

Paste the name of the value field "NUMBER_of_assemblies" inside the quotation marks (you can also select it from a list which opens by clicking on the Select button), then click the Check button to verify the syntax.

6. 7. 8.

Click OK in the Check dialog. Click OK in the Formula Contents dialog. Click OK in the Value Field Properties dialog.

Sorting
When the value fields are placed inside the template components, the next step is to define the sorting of the fields and rows. The sorting is done at three levels:
Inside the value field alpha-numerically ascending or descending (A to Z Z A). or to Sorting of value field distinguishes all different values of the field and a new row will be written to each different value.

Between the value fields according to the appearance order in the Content Browser by sort order priority. The sort priority determines how several value fields affect the sorting of a row. Read more about value field sorting in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > Value fields > Set sort priority of value fields.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

11

The sort type of a row by sorting type values Combine and Distinct which separate or combine identical row contents. Read more about row sorting in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template components > Editing component properties > Edit sort type of row.

Note: When you want to sum value field values, make sure that the sort type of the row containing the value field is Combine. This ensures that your will be

outputting only summary lines instead of repeating lines with information on individual database objects. Read more about summing field values in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > Value fields > Sum field values automatically.

Define sort order inside value fields

Define first the sorting inside the value fields. 1. Double-click on the "Assembly_position" value field in the content browser or inside the template component and set the order to be "Ascending". The field values are sorted alphabetically from A to , which can be seen in the content browser as an arrow. Z

2.

Repeat for the "Part_position", "Bolt_diameter", "Bolt_standard", "Bolt_length", "Washer_diameter", "Washer_standard", "Nut_diameter" and "Nut_standard" value fields in all rows.

Define sort order between value fields

Next, set the sorting between the value fields by giving the sort order priority in the content browser.

1.

Select the Assembly_position value field in the Content Browser and click on the Move item up button. You can also drag and drop the value field into a new location.

The assemblies become sorted first by assembly position number, then by amount of assemblies. 2. Repeat for all value fields in the following rows as shown in the example below:

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

12

Define sort order between rows

If all the rows have identical values in all value fields that are used in sorting, the rows are called "Duplicate lines". If you want to output only one line instead of outputting a line for each duplicate object, set the row sort type to be COMBINE. Then, for example, 5 pieces of assembly A/1 is listed in one row instead of 5 rows. 1. 2. Double-click on the "Steel_assembly" row in the content browser or the corresponding component border to open the Row Properties dialog. Set the Sort type to Combine.

3. 4.

Click OK. Repeat for all other rows.

Summing
When the row's sort type is set to "Combine", the value field can be summed. Value field summing has three options:

"Don't sum values" gives the value of an individual field. "Sum values across all rows" gives a total sum of all identical value fields in the

whole template, independent of the hierarchical structure of the rows.

"Sum values within one row" gives a sum of identical value fields inside the

hierarchical structure.

Define summing of NUMBER value fields

First, define the summing of the number of assemblies. 1.

2. 3.

Open the "NUMBER_of_assemblies" value field properties dialog. Set the summing option to Sum values across all rows. Close the dialog by clicking OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

13

4.

Next, set the summing of the number of parts inside one assembly. Because the part row is hierarchically under the assembly row in the Content Browser, you must use the summing option Sum values within one row to get the number of identical parts inside one assembly. (If the option Sum values across all rows were used, the number of identical parts would be multiplied with the number of identical assemblies.)

5.

Define the summing of the number of bolts, washers and nuts using the Sum values within one row summing option.

Edit component properties

Rules
The row rule is used if a row is to be output only under some special conditions. Read more about rules in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with formulas and rules. In this example template, we want to list only workshop bolts and leave site bolts out. Therefore, a rule is needed to separate them and output only the shop bolts. 1. 2. Double-click on the Bolt row in the content browser or the corresponding component border to open the Row Properties dialog. Click on the Wizard button to open the Rule Wizard.

3.

First, select the attribute by clicking on the None button, which opens the Select Attribute or Value Field dialog.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Select the attribute "SITE_WORKSHOP". Click OK. Set the Condition to be "Equals". Set the Value to be "Workshop"

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

14

8.

Click OK in the Rule Wizard dialog.

The rule is generated into the Rule box. Read more about the Wizard in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with formulas and rules > Row rules > Rule Wizard dialog.

9.

Click OK in the Row Properties dialog.

10. Repeat for the Washer and Nut rows.

Height
Next, edit the template component heights to fit the contents by selecting the component handle in the middle and dragging them.

The final template rows should look like this:

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

15

1.2 Convert Old Templates to New Format

When you open an old template file, the Template Editor automatically converts it to the new format. In the converted template, you need to do some editing: define the hierarchy, rules and sorting of the rows and fields. Read more about Template conversion in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Template Conversion.

Convert assembly_part_list.tpl template

1. The converting process starts with opening the file to be converted. Select File > Open or click on the corresponding icon.

2.

Select the file assembly_part_list.tpl from the browser. It should be located in the Template folder of your environment folder of the Tekla Structures program folders.

Template Editor automatically recognizes an old file and prompts you to convert it to the new format.

3.

Click Yes.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

16

4.

Define the conversion options.

Always back-up the original file for later usage.

5.

Click OK. The converted template is opened with an info dialog about the grid spacing and a list of warnings is displayed. Read more about warnings in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Template conversion > Template conversion warnings.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

17

Edit the template components

1. Rename the template components using descriptive names. See previous section for the naming procedure.

2.

Define the hierarchy of the rows by shifting the part row down a level. See the previous section and Appendix I on how to define the hierarchy.

3.

Edit component rules. As the content type of the row is now defined in the Row Properties dialog, rules are no longer needed to define it. Therefore, the unnecessary rules can be removed. Open the Row Properties dialog and click on the Advanced button.

4.

Select the rule and delete it.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

18

5. 6.

Click OK in the Rule Wizard dialog. Click OK in the Row Properties dialog.

Edit template objects

Value fields

Check all value field contents: some of the attribute names are different from those in the Template Editor version 2.2, and the formula structure has changed as well. Read more about attribute names in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Template conversion > Troubleshooting conversion > Mapping attribute names and properties in template conversion. 1. Open the value field properties dialog for each value field and check the attribute name. A warning is displayed if the attribute is unknown.

2. 3.

Open the list of attributes by clicking on the Attribute button. Select the correct attribute from the list and click OK.

4.

It is advisable to load the default settings for the attribute as prompted on the dialog.

5.

Define the sorting of the value fields after conversion, where needed. See the previous section for detailed sorting instructions. The same sorting rules apply to converted value fields as to those created by the user: Check the alphabetical sorting of the value fields in the content browser and change the ascending / descending values if needed. See the appearance order of value fields in the content browser and shift them to the correct location. The current order is converted according to the sorting order in the old template. Also check whether similar rows need to be displayed.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

19

6.

Rename the value fields to more descriptive ones. After conversion, the names appear

in the format field_ATTRIBUTE_NAME. Keep in mind that the value field names must be unique.

You can rename the objects directly in the content browser, without opening the properties dialog.

7.

Align the value fields with text objects. First, select the objects and then right-click and Align > Lefts.

8.

Go through the summing value fields in the footer. Change the formulas to have the correct value field names inside the brackets and quotation marks. See the previous section for more information.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

20

9.

Next, change the color of the value fields. Select all value fields by picking them while holding down the Shift key.

10. Right-click and select Properties . 11. Click on the Font button. 12. Change the color to red.

13. Click OK in the Select Font dialog. 14. Click OK in the Value Field Properties dialog.

Graphical objects

Next, edit the colors of all border lines in the template. 1. 2. 3. Select all lines by picking them while holding down the Shift key. Right-click and select Properties . Change the color to yellow.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

21

4.

Click OK.

Text objects

Next, edit the colors of all text strings. 1. 2. 3. Select all text strings of the same font size by picking them while holding down the Shift key. Right-click and select Properties . Click on the Font button.

4. 5. 6.

Change the color to green. Click OK in the Select Font dialog. Click OK in the Text Properties dialog.

Fit template components by the objects

The right side of template components can be fitted by the contents. Select the menu command Edit > Crop > Template Right Side. Empty spaces are cut off from the right side. The finalized template should now look like the example below:

Convert assembly_bolt_list.tpl template

The second example of file conversion has an additional hierarchy definition for a missing object branch. 1. The converting process starts again with the opening command.

2.

and selecting the file to be converted: this time the file assembly_bolt_list.tpl.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

22

3. 4.

Define the conversion options and edit the template components and objects like in the previous example but leave the hierarchy definition for the next task.

Hierarchy

The whole hierarchy of the objects must be defined in the template (see appendix I) in order to get the data of sub-rows. In this example bolts are attached to some part, not to the assembly directly. Therefore, an additional row is needed between the assembly and bolt rows. 1. In the components toolbar select "Row".

2.

Select "PART" as the content type

A new row is created. 3. 4. Double-click on the new row in the content browser or on the row border in the editor to open the Row Properties dialog. Enter a descriptive name for the row in the Content Browser.

5. 6.

Move the row up between the Assembly and Bolt rows by selecting the row and clicking on the Move item up button. Shift the Part row hierarchically down a level under the Assembly row by clicking on the Shift row down a level button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

23

7.

Select the Bolt row and shift it under the part row by clicking on the Shift row down a level button twice.

Visibility

The Part row can now be hidden in the final output. 1. 2. 3. Open the Part row's properties dialog. Tick the Hide in output field. The row is run, but not printed into final output. Click OK.

The hidden row is displayed as a dashed line.

New objects

The Part row needs some contents. Add a value field PART_POS with ascending sorting into the row in order to have all different parts listed. It will not be visible, because the row has the option "Hide in output". The final template should look like this:

The hidden objects (row and value field) are displayed as dashed lines.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

24

1.3 Convert an AutoCAD File into a Template

You can use AutoCAD (DXF or DWG AutoCAD 2000 and older) files and MicroStation (DGN MicroStation DGN 7) files in graphical templates. Template editor imports the files and converts their contents to a group of drawing objects. If you have designed a template with AutoCAD you can use free attributes in AutoCAD to mark value fields. Template Editor automatically converts them to value field objects as the file is imported. Read more about warnings in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > AutoCAD and MicroStation files > limitations in AutoCAD and MicroStation file imports.

Create a drawing title and revision templates

Create a new template

1. 2. 3.

Create a new graphical template by clicking on the New icon or by selecting New on the File drop-down menu or by typing Ctrl + N. Select Graphical template as the template type. Click OK. A new template is created.

Insert a row and define its properties

1.

Insert a single row by clicking on the Row button on the Component toolbar.

2.

Select the content type to be "DRAWING", because we are inserting a drawing title block. The available attributes depend on the content type. If the file which will be imported has attribute fields, it is essential to set the row's content type so that the corresponding attributes are available in the template.

3. 4.

Open the Row Properties dialog and give a descriptive name for the row. Set the row height to 100 mm.

5.

Click OK.

Insert the AutoCAD file and edit its contents

Now you can insert the AutoCAD file inside the row. 1. 2. 3. Select Insert > File. Pick the file you want to insert. Double-click on the spot where you want to position the lower left corner of the title block.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

25

Template Editor opens a dialog for size and scale definition.

4.

the Select the Scale radio button and set the scale to 1 AutoCAD block will be in scale 1:1 in the work area. If you want to define the size, select the Dimensions radio button and enter horizontal and vertical values.

The title block is inserted as a group of objects inside the row borders.

and it appears in the content browser as a group.

Ungroup the inserted block

In order to edit the contents of the inserted block, you need to ungroup it first by selecting the group and right-click > Ungroup. Read more about groups in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with template objects > Editing template objects > Group or ungroup objects. The individual objects inside the block become editable and visible in the content browser.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

26

Group the lines of the company logo

Objects, such as lines, are now separate and in some cases it is advisable to regroup them. Next, we will form a group of the lines, which form the company logo. 1. oom in to the logo with the middle mouse roll button. Z

2. 3.

Using area select, select all the lines which form the logo. Right-click > Group. A group is created.

You can resize the group by dragging the corner handles. Group properties, like color, can be edited on the Group Properties dialog (select the group and right-click > Properties).

Define fonts for the texts

The fonts used in text objects are mapped to Tekla fonts. This may slightly distort the font alignment within the text object as the original font geometry is not available in Template Editor. You need to edit the text properties. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the text you want to edit. Right-click > Properties. Click on the Font button. Select either a TrueType font or a Tekla font on the list. Select the font size. Select Ratio (h/w) in the Effects section and change it to "0.6". Click OK in the Select Font dialog. Click OK in the Text Properties dialog.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

27

Define the value fields

1.

The attribute fields in the AutoCAD file have been converted into value fields, but the attributes need to be defined. Go through all value fields and set the attributes into the Formula field in the Value Field Properties dialog using the list under the Attribute button. Read more about attribute descriptions in Tekla Structures Help: System > Appendix D: Template fields. Open the Value Field Properties dialog by double clicking the "PROJECTNO" value field in the content browser or in the work area. A warning of missing attribute is displayed and it can be ignored and closed by clicking the OK button.

2.

3. 4.

Push the Attribute button to open the Select attribute dialog. Select the corresponding attribute from the list and accept with OK.

5.

Load the default settings for the attribute by clicking the Yes button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

28

6. 7. 8.

Close the dialog with OK. Repeat for the rest of the value fields. Finally, save the template.

Break the template into two separate templates

You can open several templates simultaneously. Read more about working with multiple templates in TempEd Help: Template Editor > Working with templates > Creating, opening & saving templates > Work with multiple templates . Each template is displayed in its own window inside the work area and as a folder in the content browser. You can cut or copy template objects from one template and paste them into another template easily when multiple templates are open. We will next separate the revision lines from the drawing title and create a new template for them. 1. Area select the objects lines and value fi elds which are to be cut from the drawing title template (deselect the row by holding the Ctrl key down and picking the border).

2.

Cut the objects using Ctrl + x or right-click > Cut. Create a new graphical template. Insert a row. Set the row content type to be REVISION. Because the area needed for pasting must be large enough, edit the template page width to be 215 mm. Double-click on an empty area to open the Page Properties dialog.

3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

Paste the objects inside the row using Ctrl + v or right-click > Paste.

The value fields and drawing lines are inserted into the new template. Now, save both templates.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

29

Edit the new template

The new template needs some editing. We will create a header and a footer and move the texts and the some of the lines into them leaving only the value fields into the row. 1. Create the header by clicking on the Header icon.

2.

Create the footer by clicking on the Footer icon.

3.

Select the lines, which form the upper row above the Value fields.

4. 5. 6.

Cut and paste them to the header. Select the texts and the lines which form the lower row below the value fields. Cut and paste them to the footer.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

30

7.

Select the row and resize the template components to fit the objects inside them using the Edit > Crop > Template right side and Edit > Crop > Component height functions.

8.

Save the template.

Create a "bill of materials" template

Using the same procedure of AutoCAD file insertion, we will next create a bill of materials template to be used in multi-drawings.
Create a new template

1. 2. 3.

Create a new graphical template by clicking on the New icon or by selecting New from the File drop-down menu or by typing Ctrl + N. Select Graphical template as the template type. Click OK. A new template is created.

Insert a row and define its properties

1.

Insert a single row by clicking on the Row button on the Component toolbar.

2. 3.

Select the content type to be "ASSEMBLY", because we are inserting an assembly related file block. Check the dimensions of the AutoCAD block and edit the template page properties accordingly. Double-click on an empty space to open the page properties dialog. It is essential to have the same dimensions in the template and in the AutoCAD file in order for the scale to be the same.

Insert the AutoCAD file

Now you can insert the AutoCAD file inside the row. 1. Select Insert > File on the drop-down menu.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

31

2. 3.

Pick the file which you want to insert in the browser. Double-click on the spot where you want to position the lower left corner of the block and set the scale to be 1:1. A group of objects is inserted inside the row borders.

Design the template contents and break the block

Next examine the file contents and design your template contents: What template components do you need?A header, some rows What content types do you need for the rows?Assembly, part, bolt Do you need hierarchy between the components?Assembly part bolt relations What kinds of objects do you need?Value fields what attributes should you use? How do you divide the contents of the block? What object goes where? When you design your template structure, always keep in mind that the attributes collect data directly from objects in the Tekla Structures model and the content type of the rows determine what attributes are available. Also note the hierarchical structure of the objects in the model and how it affects the template.
Create template components and define content types

Next, insert the needed template components: header, which will have the labels, rows for assembly, part and bolt data and some rows for empty space. Click on the "Header" and "Row" button on the Component toolbar and define the content types for the rows: assembly, part and bolt leave tw o row's content type undefined.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

32

Define the hierarchy

Because we would like to list all parts under the assemblies which they form, we need to set an assemblyart hierarchy for the rows. Bolts will be listed separately, so no hierarchy is p needed there. In the Content Browser, select the part row and shift it down a level under the assembly row using the Shift row down a level button.

Divide AutoCAD block contents into template components

Now, we can start putting the template objects into the components. Start by ungrouping the AutoCAD block. 1. 2. Select the block. Right-click > Ungroup.

Cut the objects from the block and paste them into the components which you have created.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

33

1.

Select the texts and lines which will go into the header and cut and paste them.

2.

Then cut and paste the texts and lines which belong to the assembly row.

3.

Continue with part row objects.

4.

Then move the bolt "header" information into the empty content type row.

5.

Followed by the bolt row contents.

6.

And finally contents of one single, empty row the lines, without any texts. just

Then copy and paste the last empty row with the contents into the template and lift the new row up under the assembly row using the Move item up button in the Content Browser.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

34

We now have all the needed template components and more, so we can clean the template by deleting the first row with the remains of the block, which are no longer needed. Select the components and resize them to fit the objects inside them using the Edit > Crop > Template right side and Edit > Crop > Component height commands.

Insert value fields

When the template components are filled with the correct objects from the AutoCAD block, we will replace the texts inside the rows with value fields, which will collect data automatically from the Tekla Structures model. When deciding what attributes should be used, note the content type of the row and the label in the header, which refers to the contents of the value field. Read more about attribute descriptions in Tekla Structures Help: System > Appendix D: Template fields. 1. 2. 3. 4. Start with the assembly row and select the number under QY. T Delete it. Pick the value field icon and point the location inside the Assembly row. A list of assembly related attributes opens in a separate dialog. Select the NUMBER attribute.

5. 6.

Continue with the "Ship mark" by deleting the text and inserting a value field which has the ASSEMBLY_POS attribute. Complete the row by replacing the texts with the corresponding value fields.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

35

7.

Insert value fields also into the part and bolt rows the same way.

Set rules for rows using Wizard

After component objects are in place, you can define the rules for rows. We will next use the rule wizard for creating an "if else" stat ement for the bolt title row to place the row into then the 23rd row of the page. 1. Open the Row Properties dialog of the row having the bolt title information.

2.

Click on the Wizard button.

3. 4.

Click on the None button under the attributes. Select the ROW_IN_PAGE attribute from the list. The attribute name appears in the button.

5.

Then set the value to be equal to "23".

6.

Click OK. The rule is generated automatically: if (GetValue("ROW_IN_PAGE") == "23") then Output() else StepOver() endif

7.

Close the properties dialog with OK and save the template.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

36

APPENDIX I

Hierarchy of objects in a cast unit in a Tekla Structures model

CAST UNIT PART SURFACING REBAR MESH BOLT WASHER NUT STUD HOLE

ASSEMBLY PART SURFACING REBAR MESH BOLT WASHER NUT STUD HOLE WELD DRAWING REVISION

DRAWING REVISION

DRAWING REVISION

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Template Editor

37

Principles of Drawings

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training March 16, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

10

Principles of Working with Drawings ........................................................................ 3

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 Integration between Drawings and the Model............................................................................4 Creating Drawings .....................................................................................................................6 Drawing List.............................................................................................................................12 Drawing Levels ........................................................................................................................16 Drawing Objects ......................................................................................................................22 Drawing Layouts......................................................................................................................26 Plotting Drawings.....................................................................................................................38 Controlling Drawing Revisions.................................................................................................41

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

10

Principles of Working with Drawings

In this lesson

This chapter introduces the principles of working with drawings in Tekla Structures. We will first explain the integration between drawings and the model. Then we will introduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawing from the Basic Model 1 model (see the picture below presenting the steel frame). GA drawings will be used as examples throughout this lesson.

We will also: Introduce other drawing types available in Tekla Structures Introduce the drawing list Introduce the various levels of editing the drawings Study the drawing objects and layout Plot drawings Introduce revision control

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

10.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model

Tekla Structures stores all the important project information in one place, i.e. the model. Drawings and other printouts such as reports, nc data files etc. are output produced directly from the model.

Tekla Structures model

The model contains all the important project information: Parts' geometrical and structural information Part marking Bolts Bolt marking etc. All the modifications must be done directly in the model. The model is always modified in the Tekla Structures Model Editor.

Drawings
The drawings are current views of the members contained in the model with added definitions for: the sheet size to be used the way titles and tables are placed on the sheets what is dimensioned and how which marks are displayed

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

etc. You can create drawings at any stage of a project. Some of the drawing commands are located in the Model Editor and some are in the Drawing Editor. You will find all the commands for creating and managing drawings in the Model Editor. To view and edit drawings, you will use the Drawing Editor.
Help: Drawing > Introduction to Drawings

Changes in the model members

Changes in the model members can result in the drawings no longer being up-todate. The following are examples of changes that affect the drawings: A part's profile or geometry changes Parts have been added or deleted The number of identical parts has changed Tekla Structures updates the related drawings the next time you number the model. Numbering does not have to be up-to-date to create or open general arrangement drawings.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

10.2 Creating Drawings

We will now introduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawing of the Basic model 1 model.

General Arrangement (GA) drawings

The Tekla Structures can be used to create general arrangement (GA) drawings. GA drawings can contain several views, which can include the whole model or any part of it. With the GA drawings you can create erection, foundation and other plans, as well as details from views in the model. You can create general arrangement drawings from one or several named model view(s) with the following options: Create one drawing for each selected view Add all selected views to one drawing Create an empty drawing You can create an empty drawing and add named model views to the drawing in the Drawing Editor. The views must exist but they do not necessarily have to be open. You cannot modify the appearance, such as the viewing angle, of model views in the Drawing Editor. Therefore, check and modify the appearance of model views in the Model Editor before creating GA drawings. For example, check that the plan views are really 2D views, and rotate the rendered 3D views the way you want them to be shown in the drawing. See Lesson 12 for more information about creating GA drawings. In the example below, we will create a general arrangement drawing from Basic Model 1 by including several named model views in the drawing. You do not need to number the model, or update numbering to create or open general arrangement drawings.

Start GA drawing creation

To create a GA drawing that contains selected views, e.g. 3d, GRID 3 and GRID A, from Basic Model 1: 1. Open Basic Model 1. 2. Select Drawing > General arrangement drawing... from the menu. 3. Select the 3d, GRID 3 and GRID A views in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box. Then select the option All selected views to one drawing.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

You can select multiple views (or toggle the selection) in the dialog box above by holding down the Ctrl key and picking each view separately. GA drawing views are automatically labeled with the current view name. With the One drawing per view option you can select all the plan views in the dialog box, and create separate drawings with predefined drawing properties all at once.
Define drawing properties

To define the properties of the GA drawing: 1. Click the Drawing properties... button to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. 2. Select A1-BLANK settings from the option menu and click Load. 3. Give the drawing a distinctive name in the Name field, e.g. STEEL FRAME (or CONCRETE FRAME if your model was made of precast concrete beams and columns). 4. Click the View... button to open the General - view properties dialog box.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

5. On the Attributes tab, change the drawing scale to 100 and click OK to apply the scale and close the dialog box.

If you have a steel frame

6. Click the Weld button to open the General - welding properties dialog box. 7. On the Content tab, set the Visibility of site and workshop welds to None and click OK.

If you have a concrete frame

6. Click the Reinforcement button to open the General reinforcing bar properties dialog box. 7. On the Bar content tab, set the Visibility of all reinforcing bars to Not visible and click OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

8. Click the Filter... button to open the General - filter properties dialog box. 9. On the Parts tab, use the Filter by Material field to filter drawing objects so that no concrete parts are shown. Enter K* as the filter string, tick the Not option on and click OK.

8. Click the Filter... button to open the General - filter properties dialog box. 9. On the Parts tab, use the Filter by Name field to filter drawing objects so that only beams and columns are shown. Click OK.

10. In the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box, save the selected drawing properties with a unique file name, e.g. steelframe (or concreteframe),
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

by typing the file name and then clicking the Save as button. Drawing property files steelframe.gd and steelframe.gd.more are created in the ..\Basic Model 1\attributes folder.

11. Click OK to apply the selected GA drawing settings and to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. For more information on drawing properties, see Help: Drawing > Drawing properties.
Create and open the GA drawing

To create and open the GA drawing: 1. Select the Open drawing checkbox in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to have Tekla Structures automatically open the drawing.

2. Click Create. 3. Check that the created GA drawing is as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

10

All of the views in the GA drawing will be created according to the same GA drawing properties you applied. If some views need different properties, you have to modify the view properties afterwards in the Drawing Editor.

You can first define the GA drawing properties by selecting Properties > General arrangement drawing... from the menu, and then load and apply the desired properties. After that open the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box to create the GA drawing with the selected views.

Other drawing types

In addition to general arrangement drawings, four other types of drawings can be created in Tekla Structures. These will be presented in greater detail in Lessons 11 and 13.
Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of individual steel parts. Drawings can be produced for any steel part in the model. The single-part drawings can contain holes but welded parts cannot be included. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module. Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings where details of an assembly consisting of steel parts are presented for fabrication. In most cases, an assembly consists of single steel parts that are either bolted or welded to the main steel part. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module. Cast unit (CU) drawings are formwork or reinforcement drawings of reinforced concrete structures such as foundations. This drawing type is available in the Precast Concrete Detailing module. Multi-drawings are workshop drawings which gather together several single-part or assembly drawings on one sheet. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module.

Lesson 11 Assembly and single-part drawings / Cast unit drawings Lesson 13 Multi-drawings and multinumbering

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

11

10.3 Drawing List

We will briefly cover the Tekla Structures drawing list. You can use the drawing list to: Select and open your drawings for viewing and editing in the Drawing Editor Update, clone and delete drawings Update GA drawing marks Display and filter drawings shown in the list Choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings) Lock, freeze and issue drawings Add revisions to drawings Modify properties of several drawings at a time. The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing size and type, etc. See Lesson 13 for updating GA drawings.

Opening and closing drawings

You can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that drawing before opening the next one.
Open drawing list and a GA drawing

To open the drawing list and a drawing in Tekla Structures: 1. Select Drawing > List from the menu or click the Open drawing list icon on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the drawing list select the previously created G [ ]drawing. 1 3. Click Open, or double-click on the drawing to open it in the Drawing Editor. See also Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Opening drawings. When selecting GA drawings in the drawing list, the activated buttons at the bottom of the Drawings dialog box are Open, Update marks, Delete and Cancel. The table below describes their functionality.

Button Open

Description

Opens the selected drawing in the Drawing Editor. You can only select one drawing from the list at a time. If the Open button is grayed, you have more than one drawing selected. You can also double-click a drawing on the list to open it. See also
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

12

Button

Description

Opening drawings.
Open next/previous Update

Opens the previous or next drawing in the list. Updates frozen drawings, and recreates unfrozen drawings. Locked drawings are not updated. Updates marks in selected drawings. Clones the selected drawing for a similar part. Deletes selected drawings. You cannot delete locked drawings. Closes the dialog box.

Update marks Clone Delete Cancel

Close a drawing

To close the drawing in the Drawing Editor: 1. Select File > Close drawing from the menu or click the cross in the upper right corner of the drawing window. 2. Tekla Structures asks: Do you want to save the current drawing? 3. Select Save or Save and Freeze to keep the changes that you have made to the drawing, or close the drawing without saving by clicking No.

Drawing list contents

All of your existing drawings are shown in the drawing list. The example below shows the header line information that is available in the drawing list.

See also Help: Drawings > Getting started with drawings > Drawing list. The table below explains the header line items of the drawing list.
Item Flags Explanation

Flags are characters (I, L, F, n, *, etc.) at the beginning of each row. They indicate the drawing status.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

13

Item Dates Revision Size Type

Explanation

The creation and modification dates of the drawing. The revision number or mark of the drawing. Paper size, which is shown automatically. The drawing types are identified by the following letters: W for single-part drawings. A for assembly drawings. C for cast-unit drawings. G for general arrangement drawings. M for multi-drawings.

Mark

The drawing mark is the number of the part from which the drawing was created. You cannot change drawing marks. You can add a drawing title using the Name field in the drawing properties dialog box. Add extra drawing title fields to the drawing properties dialog box. Include up to 20 user-defined attributes in drawing lists.

Name

Title 1, Title 2, Title 3 User-defined attributes

You can sort the order of the drawings by clicking the desired header line button in the drawing list. You can adjust the column widths of the drawing list and Tekla Structures will keep the changes.

Drawing status flags

The status of drawings is represented by flags, which are shown on the left hand side of the drawing list. For more information about drawing status flags, see Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing status flags.
Lock and Issue flags can be manually added to the selected drawings. The M flag appears automatically on issued GA drawings that have been modified.

Lock GA and other drawings from being accidentially deleted or changed.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

14

Use the buttons on the right hand side of the drawing list to change the status of a drawing. Alternatively, select the drawing in the list, right-click to open the pop-up menu and change the drawing status.

Lock a GA drawing

To lock and unlock a GA drawing: 1. Select the G 1]drawing in the drawing list. [ 2. Click the Lock - On button and the L flag will appear. 3. Try to delete the drawing by clicking Delete. 4. Try to open the drawing by clicking Open. 5. Click the Lock - Off button to reset the lock. 6. Click Open. The drawing opens in the Drawing Editor. You cannot open or delete a locked drawing without unlocking it.

Issue a GA drawing

To issue a GA drawing: 1. Select the G 1]drawing in the drawing list. [ 2. Click the Issue - On button and the I flag will appear. 3. Open the drawing to view the GA drawing title. 4. Check that the issue date is shown correctly in the drawing title.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

15

10.4 Drawing Levels

You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels: Drawing properties View properties Object properties For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see the following help files:
Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Three levels of editing drawings Help: Drawing > Drawing properties Lesson 12 GA drawings

Modify drawing properties

On the highest level you can change the drawing properties, which affect all of the objects in the drawing.
Modify part's color on drawing level

To change the GA drawing properties, e.g. the color of parts, in the Drawing Editor: 1. Select Properties > Drawing... on the menu or double-click on the drawing to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. 2. Click the Part... button to open the General - part properties dialog box. 3. Select the Appearance tab. 4. Change the Color of Visible lines, e.g., to green. Check and see that the checkbox is marked with a tick.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

16

5. Click Modify and OK. Create another GA drawing by following the steps described in Chapter 10.2 Creating drawings. Select different views, e.g. the PLAN +0 and PLAN +13400 views, to be included in the drawing.
Change grid visibility of many GA drawings

To simultaneously change the drawing properties, e.g. grid visibility, of more than one GA drawing: 1. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor. 2. Select two GA drawings in the drawing list by holding down the Ctrl key. 3. Right-click to open the pop-up menu. 4. Select Properties... or press Alt+Enter as shortcut to open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

5. Click the Grid... button to open the General - grid properties dialog box. 6. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes. 7. Change the grid visibility to Not visible.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

17

8. Click Modify and OK. 9. Click OK to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box. 10. Open the modified drawings one at a time to check that the changes were carried out correctly. Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by changing the drawing properties. These modifications also remain when the drawing is recreated due to a model change.

Modify view properties

The second level is to edit the view level, where you modify the selected drawing's view.
Modify properties of selected view

To present hidden lines of adjacent parts and to add part marks to the GRID A view of the G 1]drawing: [ 1. Double-click on the border around the GRID A drawing view to open the View properties dialog box.

Show hidden lines of parts

2. Click the Part button to open the View part properties dialog box. 3. Select the Content tab. 4. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes. 5. Turn the Hidden lines option on. Check that the checkbox is marked with a tick.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

18

6. Click Modify and OK.

Change part mark content

7. Click the Part mark button to open the View part mark properties dialog box. 8. On the Content tab, remove the <<Assembly position>> from the Elements in mark list for the main parts, and add Profile to the list.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

19

9. On the General tab, change Visibility in view to always and click Modify and OK.

The GRID A view should now show the hidden lines of adjacent parts and part marks representing the main part profiles.

Dashed line type in part mark frames and leader lines indicate that the object is behind another object in the drawing.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

20

Modify object properties

The third and lowest level is to edit at the object level, where you change individual objects in the drawing.
Modify frame and leader line of a single part mark

To change the properties of a single part mark: 1. In the GRID A view, double-click on the part mark of the RHS profile (diagonal brace) to open the Part mark properties dialog box. 2. On the General tab, change the frame and leader line types as shown below.

3. Click Modify and OK. The part mark should now look like the following.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

21

10.5 Drawing Objects

In Tekla Structures, the term drawing object refers to lines, rectangles, arcs, circles, poly-lines, polygons, clouds, symbols, text, DWG/DXF files, marks and dimensions. General arrangement drawings are not automatically dimensioned in Tekla Structures. Therefore you need to dimension GA drawings manually. In addition, you may want to include additional drawing objects for temporary and/or revisionrelated information, e.g. clouds and text. For more information, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings.

Create Drawing Objects

In the G 1]drawing, we will manually dimension the location of the diagonal [ bracing connection and add a cloud and a note text to the connection.
Create manual dimensions

To add manual Y-dimensions to the diagonal bracing connection (on gridline 3) in the GRID A view: 1. Set the snap settings on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar as shown below.

2. To enable the tentative snap, which helps with the selecting of points, check that the Xsnap is set on in the Setup menu.

3. Click the Create y dimension icon on the Drawings: Dimension toolbar.

4. Snap, first, to the center point of the connection created between the four diagonal braces, and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID +0. Move the cursor to the left side of GRID 3 to select the location of the dimension line. End the command with the middle mouse button. 5. Snap again to the center point of the connection and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID +13400, select the dimension line location and click the middle mouse button. 6. Select both dimensions (by holding down the Ctrl key), right-click and select Combine dimension lines on the pop-up menu. The separate dimension lines are now combined to one dimension line. Select the dimension line and move it to the correct location by dragging with the mouse.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

22

You should now have the vertical location of the diagonal brace connection shown in the GRID A view (see the figure below).

Create a cloud

To add a cloud and a note text to the GRID A view: 1. Click the Snap to any position icon on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

23

2. Click the Draw cloud icon on the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.

3. Pick points for the cloud position around the diagonal bracing connection on gridline 3. End the selection with the middle mouse button.

Create a note text for the cloud

1. Select Properties > Text to open the Text properties dialog box. 2. Select the standard settings from the option menu and click Load. 3. Change the text properties and frame as shown below and click Apply and OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

24

4. Click the Create text with leader line icon in the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.

5. First, pick an edge of the cloud as the origin of the leader line and then another point to place the text. The GRID A view should now look like the figure shown below:

6. Select File > Close drawing and click Save in the Question dialog box.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

25

10.6 Drawing Layouts

Now we will have a brief introduction on how the Tekla Structures drawing layouts function. A drawing consists of the layout and drawing views, e.g. plans, side views, and section views. A layout connects a set of table layouts and a set of drawing sizes. Before you create a drawing, you must select a layout. The example below illustrates the relationship between the table layout and drawing views. The drawing views are blue, and the elements of table layout are red.

See the following links for more information about drawing layouts:
Lesson 12 GA drawing Help: Drawing > Drawing layout

View contents of a drawing layout

An example of a GA drawing layout for the A3 drawing sheet size is shown below. The drawing title and revision table included in this layout are also shown separately and enlarged.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

26

Revision table:

Drawing title for GA drawings:

View GA drawing table layout

To view the contents of the GA drawing table layout in the Model Editor: 1. Select Properties > Layout from the menu to open the Layout dialog box. 2. Select ga in the list of Layouts and click the Table layout button to open the Table layouts dialog box.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

27

3. Select ga in the list of Table layouts and click the Tables button to open the Tables dialog box.

4. The content of the ga table layout is presented in the Chosen tables list.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

28

5. Select the drawing_title_ga and revision table one at a time to view their location in the table layout. The former, for example, is bound by its lower right corner to the lower right corner of the drawing frame (that is the reference object).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

29

6. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Create a new layout

We will use the existing ga layout as basis for creating a new layout for GA drawings.
Create a new GA drawing layout

To create a new layout: 1. Open the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu. 2. Select ga from the list of Layouts and type a name for the new layout (as shown below) and click Add.

3. Select the newly created ga_new layout in the list and click Table layout to open the Table layouts dialog box. 4. Select ga in the list of Table layouts and type a name for the new table layout (as shown below) and click Add.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

30

5. Select the newly created ga_new table layout in the list and click Tables to open the Tables dialog box. 6. Select drawing_title_ga, revision and tender_document one at a time in the Available tables list and add them (using the arrow button) to the Chosen tables list.

7. Set the location and click Update for each table separately (as shown below).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

31

8. Click OK to apply and close the Tables dialog box. 9. Click Update in the Table layouts dialog box to update the ga_new table layout and click OK to close the dialog box. 10. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box. The new layout settings were saved with the file name ga_new.lay to the ..\Basic Model 1\attributes folder.
Define drawing sizes for the new layout

Before using the new layout, we need to define drawing size where it will be used. In Tekla Structures, you have two options how to set the drawing size. You can either: Specify exact sizes for drawings. Let Tekla Structures find appropriate drawing sizes (according to the layout, tables in it, and the drawing view scales). To define fixed drawing sizes: 1. Reopen the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu. 2. Select ga_new from the list of Layouts and click Fixed sizes

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

32

3. In the Fixed sizes dialog, type name ga_new_A3 for new size, define width and height for A3 size drawing (410 x 287), and click Add.

4. Select ga_new from Table layout pull-down menu and click Update. You have now defined ga_new_A3 size to use ga_new layout.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

33

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for ga_new_A4, drawing size A4 (287x200). 6. Click OK to close the Fixed sizes dialog box. 7. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box. To define calculated drawing sizes: 1. Reopen the Layout dialog box from the Properties menu. 2. Select ga_new from the list of Layouts and click Calculated sizes

3. Connect all sizes to ga_new layout by selecting ga_new from pull-down menu.

4. Click OK to close the Calculated sizes dialog box. 5. Click OK to close the Layout dialog box.
Use the new GA drawing layout

To use the newly created GA drawing layout: 1. Open the drawing list and double-click on the G 1]drawing to open it. [ 2. Open the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box and click on the Layout button. 3. In the General layout properties dialog box, click on the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

34

4. Select the ga_new in the Layout and Table layout fields and click Modify.

5. Check that the drawing layout is changed correctly. The drawing title should be present in lower right corner of the drawing, the revision table and the note TENDER DOCUMENT is as shown below.

When the drawing is modified so that the whole drawing needs to be recreated, the drawing views are rearranged. As a result the views are placed differently thane they were before (see picture below). We will now rearrange them manually.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

35

Move drawing views

To move drawing views: 1. Select the view frame of GRID 3. 2. Hold down the Shift key and drag the view with the mouse to the right side of the 3D view. 3. Move the GRID A view correspondingly Your G 1]drawing should now look like the one shown below. [

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

36

You can place drawing views more accurately by aligning them horizontally or vertically. For instructions, see Help:
Drawing > Editing drawings > Working with drawing views > Aligning drawing views.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

37

10.7 Plotting Drawings

Tekla Structures plots drawings both to selected print devices and to files. Single drawings can be plotted from the Drawing Editor, and single or multiple drawings, which have been selected in the drawing list, can be plotted from the Model Editor.

Plotting
Plot a single GA drawing

To plot a single GA drawing from the Drawing Editor: 1. Open the G 1]drawing in the Drawing Editor. [ 2. Select File > Plot current to open the Plot dialog box, or click the Plot icon on the Drawings: Standard toolbar.

3. Select the print device (plotter) to be used and click Print.

For more information about available plot options, see Help: Drawing > Printing >
Plot options.
Plot multiple GA drawings

To plot multiple GA drawings from the Model Editor: 1. Open the drawing list. 2. Select at least two GA drawings in the drawing list. 3. Click on the Plot icon on the Standard toolbar.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

38

4. Select the print device to be used and click Print. If you select several print devices, Tekla Structures sends each drawing to the device with the smallest paper size, on which the drawing will fit.

For more information about printing to print device, see Help: Drawing > Printing >
Printing drawings.

Plotting to a file
Plot a GA drawing as a dwg file

To plot the G 1]drawing to a file: [ 1. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor. 2. Select the G 1]drawing in the list. [ 3. Click on the Plot icon to open the Plot dialog box. 4. Select DWG as the plotting format in the Plotter list. Check that the Plot to file option is marked with a tick. 5. Type .\drawings in the plot file name field below the Plot to file option. This will define the ..\Basic Model 1\drawings folder as the destination folder of the plot files.

6. Click Print to plot the drawing to DWG. 7. Give a particular plot file name by typing, e.g., ..\drawings\SteelFrame.dwg in the plot file name field, and click Print.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

39

8. Check that the drawings were successfully plotted to the ..\Basic Model 1\drawings folder. This folder should contain the saved *.dwg drawings. If you do not enter a file name for the destination plot file, or you have chosen several drawings, Tekla Structures uses the drawing name(s) as file name(s). If you do not enter a folder name, Tekla Structures creates the file(s) in the current model folder. You can also print a drawing to DWG using the Drawing Editor. Open the selected drawing and follow the above steps, starting at step 3. Tekla Structures does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. For example, a drawing named A.1 overwrites a drawing named a.1. For more information about plotting to file, see:
Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings > Printing to DWG/DXF Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings to file

For more information about defining drawing plot file names and plot directories, see:
Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing drawings to file > Switches for naming plotfiles

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

40

10.8 Controlling Drawing Revisions

Now we will cover the revision handling features of Tekla Structures. When the model changes: You have to update or revise drawings Attach revision information to the drawings. Tekla Structures displays the revision information alongside the revision number or the mark in the drawing list and in the revision table within the drawings. The revision table also shows the revision date. You can create a list of revisions in a report. For more information about drawing revisions and creating reports, see the following links:
Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Working with drawings > Defining drawing revisions Lesson 8 Numbering and reports

Create, modify and delete revision marks

Create revision mark

To add a revision mark to the G 1]drawing: [ 1. Modify the model by changing the profile of the columns on gridline 1 from HEA300 to HEA320. 2. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor. 3. Select the drawing to revise, right-click and select Revision to open the Revision handling dialog box.

4. Enter the revision mark, revision date and description text of the revision in the dialog box as shown below, and click Create.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

41

Once the revision is created, a revision number is automatically assigned to the drawing. The revision number is shown in the dialog box. 5. Check that the revision number is shown in the drawing list.

6. Open the drawing to check that the drawing title and revision table display the revision information correctly.

Several drawings can share the same revision mark, date, and information. To attach the same revision information to several drawings simultaneously, select multiple drawings from the drawing list.

You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows the revision numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. By default, revision numbers are shown. For more information, see the following links:
Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Defining drawing revisions Help: System > Files and folders > Startup batch file.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

42

Modify revision information

To modify the revision information of an existing revision mark: 1. First create a new revision to the G 1]drawing by following steps 2-5 presented [ above:
Change the model Use B as the revision mark Type revision date and description Click Create Leave the Revision handling dialog box open

2. Select the revision number 2 in the drop-down box next to the Mark field. The corresponding revision information is shown in the dialog box. 3. Change the revision mark to C, modify the description text, and click Modify. 4. Open the drawing to check that the modification is shown correctly in the revision table.
Delete revision mark

To delete a revision mark: 1. Select the revision number 2 in the Revision handling dialog box. 2. Click Delete. 3. The updated revision number of the drawing is now 1. Check that the revision number is shown correctly in the drawing list. Open the drawing to check that the revision table is also updated. When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjusts the remaining revision numbers for that drawing.

Show revision mark in plot file names

When you plot drawings to files such as DWG, DXF or PDF, you can include the latest revision number or mark in the plot file name. In the Plot dialog box, select the checkbox of the Include revision mark to file name option as shown below.

Show revision information in a report

The report drawing_issue_rev shows the revision dates and revision information of drawings. For more information about reports see Lesson 9 Numbering and Reports.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

43

Show revision information in report

To create a report containing the revision information: 1. Click on the Report icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Report dialog box.

2. Select the drawing_issue_rev from the report list and click the Create from all button.

3. Click on the Show button to open the report. 4. Check that the revisions are shown correctly in the report drawing_issue_rev.xsr (Tekla Structures creates the report in the model folder). See the picture below as an example of the drawing_issue_rev report. Revisions made to the G 3]drawing are marked with a red rectangle. [

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

44

Create revision marks in drawings

We will create revision marks in the drawings to help locate the changes made to the model.

For more information about creating revision marks in drawings, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings > Editing drawings reference > Create>Revision mark.
Define revision mark appearance

To create a revision mark in the G [ ]drawing: 1 1. Select the G 1]drawing in the drawing list and click on the Update marks [ button to update all marks. 2. Open the selected drawing and check that the part mark of the column on gridline 1 in the GRID A view has changed.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

45

3. Select Properties > Revision mark from the menu to open the Revision mark properties dialog box. 4. Select the revision number 1 in the drop-down box next to the Mark field to obtain the corresponding revision information.

5. On the Appearance tab, select the Arrow type as shown below, change the Frame color of the revision mark to red and click OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

46

Create revision mark in GA drawing

1. Select Create > Revision mark > Arrow on right from the menu and pick a point to place the mark. For example, pick close to the column and its part mark on gridline 1 in the GRID A view. 2. Double-click on the revision mark to obtain its properties. Check that the contents of the revision mark is correct, and its appearance corresponds to the properties set in step5.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Principles of Drawings

47

Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training May 18, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

11

Assembly and Single Part Drawings ......................................................................... 3

11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 Integration between Drawings and the Model............................................................................4 Create Drawings Using Drawing Wizards..................................................................................5 Edit Drawing Properties ...........................................................................................................13 Create a New Drawing Wizard ................................................................................................27 Edit Drawings Manually ...........................................................................................................33 Update Drawings .....................................................................................................................37 Create Drawings Manually.......................................................................................................41

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

11

Assembly and Single Part Drawings

In this lesson

We will introduce the creation of assembly and single-part drawings in Tekla Structures. We will first create single-part and assembly drawings by using predefined drawing wizards (drawing wizards are an automatic way of creating single, assembly and multi-drawings). We will then edit the drawing properties and create a new drawing wizard. The Drawing Wizard will use the edited drawing properties and the select filters that we defined in an earlier lesson. Then we will show how the same drawings can be created manually. We will also demonstrate how updating effects the drawings. Revision control of all drawing types is presented in Lesson 10 Principles of working with drawings.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

11.1 Integration between Drawings and the Model

Assembly and single-part drawings
Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of each of the individual steel parts in the model. Assembly drawings are workshop drawings, in which details of an assembly consisting of the steel parts are presented for fabrication. All of the views in single-part or assembly drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model. When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of these members. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. If the "host" member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark. Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for example, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the information in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings. You can, however, filter out parts and bolts in the drawings, or make them invisible. You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the related drawings the next time you perform numbering. For more information, see Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Basics.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

11.2

Create Drawings Using Drawing Wizards

Once you have numbered the model, you can create assembly and single-part drawings from the model. Drawing wizards are the most effective way to create drawings in Tekla Structures. Wizards automatically produce different types of drawings of different parts, such as beams, columns, and braces. You can use wizards to create single-part, assembly, or multi-drawings using the settings defined in the wizard files. You can use the predefined wizard files, edit them, or create your own drawing wizards. The Wizard dialog box lists the available wizard files.

For more information on drawing wizards, see:

Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Creating drawings > Using drawing wizards Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing reference > File>Wizard

Drawing wizards cannot be used to create General Arrangement (GA) drawings or cast unit (CU) drawings of concrete structures.

Functionality of drawing wizards

For each member type in the model, drawing wizards automatically perform the following steps: 1. Define the drawing type to be created (single, assembly or multi) 2. Select the predefined drawing properties to be used 3. With the given select filter, select the parts from which to create drawings 4. Create drawings

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

When you apply a wizard, you can choose whether the wizard creates drawings from all parts of the model, or just from the selected parts. By creating wizards that match the select filters and drawing properties in the project you can automatically create all single and assembly drawings of the parts using suitable predefined properties.

Preconditions of using a drawing wizard: Numbering of the model must be up to date The appropriate wizard file must exist The saved drawing properties listed in the wizard file must exist The saved select filters listed in the wizard file must exist Model members which will be selected by the select filter must exist

Create single-part drawings of selected parts

We will now use a drawing wizard to create single-part drawings of selected steel beams and plates.
Create single-part drawings of steel beams

1. Open the BasicModelCombined model. 2. Select the BEAM_STEEL filter from the drop-down list of available Select filters

3. Select the whole model with an area selection 4. To see the creation of the drawings, open the drawing list by clicking the Open drawing list icon.

5. Select File > Wizard from the menu or click on the Wizard icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Wizard dialog box.

6. Select Single Drawings on the Wizards tab.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

7. Click the Create from selected button. 8. In the drawing list check that single-part drawings with the title BEAM were created.

9. Open a few single-part drawings for viewing

You can view the next drawing on the list by clicking Next or using the shortcut Ctrl + Page Down

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Create single-part drawings from plates

Following the procedure above, now create single part drawings of all plates. 1. Select the PLATE select filter. 2. Select the whole model with an area selection. 3. Select Single Drawings on the Wizards tab in the wizard dialog box. 4. Click on the Create from selected button. 5. In the drawings list check that single-part drawings with the title PLATE were created. 6. Open a few single-part drawings for viewing

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

Using the procedure outlined above, you could create single-part drawings from any other selected steel parts in the model (columns, braces, angles, etc.). It is advisable to create all the single and assembly drawings with the wizard, even for a single part. Tekla Structures displays a Cancel dialog box during the creation of drawings. Click OK in the dialog box to stop creating the drawings.

Create assembly drawings of all steel parts

Next, we will create assembly drawings of all the steel parts by using another drawing wizard. To create all assembly drawings at once:
Create assembly drawings

1. Define a select filter to filter away the concrete parts, click OK.

2. Drag an area through the whole model to select all the steel parts 3. Click on the Wizard icon to open the Wizard dialog box

4. Select Assembly Drawings on the Wizards tab

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

5. Click Create from selected

Use the Create from all button to create drawings from the whole model at once.

6. In the drawings list check that the assembly drawings were created correctly (sort the drawing list by Title).

7. Open a few assembly drawings (which are not named STANDARD) for viewing

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

10

For parts that don't match with the drawing properties or filters listed in the wizard file, the predefined wizards create drawings using STANDARD properties.
Select parts with drawing title STANDARD

1. Select drawings with the title STANDARD in the drawing list. 2. Click the Filter - Select parts button

The parts associated with the selected drawings are now highlighted in the model. You will find, e.g., that objects that don't have a request in the default wizard are highlighted in the model.
Open brace drawing

1. Select one vertical brace on gridline A. 2. Click the Display - All button to ensure that all drawings are shown in the list. 3. Click the Filter - By parts button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

11

The drawing list shows now only the assembly drawing created from the brace selected in the model. The brace drawing was created with bracing properties. 4. Open the drawing

A drawing wizard will not create a duplicate drawing for any member already having, e.g., a single-part or assembly drawing.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

12

11.3

Edit Drawing Properties

We will now define specific drawing properties for both horizontal and vertical bracing and save the properties to be used later in the drawing wizard. As an example we will open one vertical brace drawing for editing. Using this drawing we will save the properties for the horizontal bracing. We will then edit some more properties and save them for the vertical bracing. The editing actions we will do are just examples of using the drawing properties. The final drawing you get depends on the environment you are using and may not be identical to this example. Study the Online help for information on each of the separate fields available in the drawing properties.
Help: Drawing > Dimensioning Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties

The drawings are created with the applied drawing properties (wizard applies the correct predefined properties automatically to parts). The quality of the automatically created drawings depends on the drawing properties used Whenever there is a need to edit the drawings, you should check if the result can be achieved by editing the drawing properties. As long as you can manage to create complete drawings by using predefined drawing properties the creation / updating of drawings will be automatic

Properties for horizontal bracing

Load properties no_dimension

1. Right-click on the drawing and select Properties to open the Assembly drawing properties 2. Load the predefined properties no_dimensions 3. Click Modify

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

13

The drawing was regenerated with no_dimension properties. It appears now without any dimensions and only the main view is visible. By default, Tekla Structures creates the additional views only if it is necessary in order to show the dimensions in the drawing.

For our purposes, we want to have both the front and top views in the brace drawings regardless of the dimensions that may be needed.
Display both front and top views

1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click the View button. 2. Choose the option on for the Front and Top views. 3. Click Modify and then OK

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

14

Main part overall dimension

The first dimension we will add is the main part overall dimension. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Dimensioning > Part dimensions. 2. Select Once for Main part overall dimensions. 3. Click Modify and then Apply

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

15

The main part overall dimension appears. We will next add the dimension between the extreme bolts.
Extreme bolts

1. On the Bolt dimensions tab select Assembly for Extreme bolts. 2. Click Modify and then Apply

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

16

The distance between the extreme bolts appears. We then continue by dimensioning the main part cuts.
Main part shape

To dimension the cuts in the main part: 1. On the Part dimensions tab turn Main part shape: to On 2. Click Modify and then Apply

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

17

The dimensions of the cuts appear in absolute dimensions. This is due to the dimension type defined in the Assembly Dimension properties tab. We will next change the dimension type to relative.
Change dimension type from absolute to relative

1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box, click Dimension 2. Change the Dimension types / In X direction to relative (see fig below).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

18

3. Click Modify and then OK

The dimensions of main part cuts now appear as relative dimensions.

By commenting environment variable, XS_NO_RELATIVE_SHAPE_DIMENSIONS, out the shape dimensions would always be relative despite the option chosen in the Dimension properties dialog box.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

19

By editing dimension planes table You can define how Tekla Structures dimensions different profiles in drawings. For example, you can have Tekla Structures always dimension rectangular hollow sections to the middle of the profile or to the top.
See Help: Drawing > Dimensioning > Dimension planes

An example of dimensioning according the prof. type 8 (=rectangular hollow sections) is set in dimension plane table by default so that Tekla Structures dimension sections to the middle of the profile 8, -1.0, TRUE*, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE*, TRUE, TRUE

To change Tekla Structures to dimension rectangular hollow sections to the left / top of the profile, set the dimensioning of prof. type 8 as shown below: 8, -1.0, FALSE, TRUE*, TRUE, FALSE, TRUE, TRUE*

Protection

You can protect areas in drawings to prevent text or dimensions being placed there. This way you can e.g. prevent the part mark (1014 in the fig. above) overlapping with the part. In cases where Tekla Structures can not find a free place for an object the objects will overlap with each others despite the switches in the protection dialog box. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box click Protection. 2. Select the checkboxes shown below. These options define that dimension lines may not overlap parts.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

20

3. Click Modify and then Apply

We will now save the properties that we have applied so far for horizontal bracing. We will then continue to edit the drawing a little and save the properties for vertical bracing.
Save as properties for bracing_H

1. Type bracing_H in the Name: field of Assembly drawing properties dialog box 2. Type bracing_H_TR in the Save as field, click the Save as button

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

21

Properties for vertical bracing

For vertical bracing we want to see the secondary part bolt internal dimensions and change the part mark frame a little as well as include the single part views of the plates. We will first add bolt dimensions to the vertical bracing.
Secondary part bolt internal

1. On the Assembly - Dimensioning properties dialog, on the Bolt dimensions tab, select Internal for Secondary part bolt internal dimensions. 2. Click Modify and then Apply

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

22

The bolt distance dimensions of the gusset plates appear.

Change the frame of part marks

We will next change the part mark frame to be rectangular. On the Assembly - part mark properties / General tab: 1. Change the Frame around mark to rectangular.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

23

2. Click Modify and then Apply

The frames of part marks change to rectangular.

Include single parts to the brace_V drawings

We will now include single-part views of the individual part components that form the assembly. 1. In the Assembly drawing properties dialog box, click Layout > Other. 2. Set Include single parts to Yes. This activates also the Single part attributes field allowing you to choose any predefined single part attributes.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

24

3. Click Modify and then Apply

The single part views for plates appear. Tekla Structures has several environment variables to customize the single part presentation in assembly drawings. For example, you can choose to exclude some single-part views from assembly drawings. Help: System > Appendix A: Variables > List of variables > S > XS_SINGLE_EXCLUDE Or you can, for example, set the scale of single-part views included in assembly drawings. Help: System > Appendix A: Variables > List of variables > S > XS_SINGLE_SCALE
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

25

Save as properties for bracing_V

We will now save the properties for vertical bracing 1. Type bracing_V in the Name: field of the Assembly drawing properties dialog box. 2. Type bracing_V_TR in the Save as field, click the Save as button

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

26

11.4

Create a New Drawing Wizard

We will next create a new assembly drawing wizard that matches the part properties and select filters defined in lesson 5. We will use the available drawing properties added with the bracing_H_TR and bracing_V_TR properties defined in this lesson. We start by creating properties for the parts not matching with the wizard requests We will then edit existing drawing requests to suit horizontal and vertical braces and use the new properties defined for them. We will delete all those requests that are not needed and finally edit a request for those parts that don't match our wizard to be shown as INCOMPLETE in the drawing list.

Create properties INCOMPLETE

1. Load standard drawing properties 2. Edit the Name: field to INCOMPLETE 3. Save the properties with the name INCOMPLETE

We will now use an existing wizard as the basis for constructing our own wizard. To create a new drawing wizard, we will perform the following steps: 1. Open an existing wizard file. 2. Save it with another name. 3. Modify the new file. 4. Test the functionality of the new wizard

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

27

The following links present more information on customizing the wizard settings and the contents of a wizard file.
Help: System > Files and folders > Customizing Tekla Structures > Creating wizard files Help: System > Files and folders > Log files > Wizard log

To create the new wizard file:

Open existing wizard file

1. Click the Wizard icon to open the Wizard dialog box.

2. Select Assembly Drawings on the Wizards tab. 3. Click Edit to open the wizard file in a text editor

Save wizard file with another name

1. Select Save as from the File menu of the text editor to save the wizard file with another name. 2. Browse to the attributes folder under your model folder, enter ASSEMBLY_TR.dproc as the file name and click Save. Note that the file extension has to be dproc.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

28

3. Check that the ASSEMBLY_TR.dproc file was created in the attributes subfolder by selecting Open model folder from the Tools menu The predefined wizard files are located in the folder ..\countries\*environment*\system. In the system folder, the wizard files are available for use in all models. Modified and saved wizard files are saved in the same folder, unless you define another destination folder (such as the model folder).
Edit the wizard file 1.

Save and Reopen the model. To have the new wizard file shown in the Wizard dialog box, you need to close and reopen the model.

2. Open the Wizard dialog box. 3. Select ASSEMBLY_TR on the Wizards tab and click Edit. 4. Find the requests for chs bracings and shs bracings.

5. Edit the requests to match the criteria for vertical and horizontal bracing shown highlighted in yellow below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

29

Delete the extra requests

6. Delete all extra requests. Only keep the following:

Beams Vertical braces Horizontal braces Rafters Purlins Columns

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

30

Change the remaining requests to use the select filters that we defined earlier, for this project.
Change the select filters

7. Change the select filters defined for steel parts in this project: column_filter to COLUMN_STEEL beam_filter to BEAM_STEEL purlin_filter to PURLIN etc.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

31

Request for the rest of the assembly drawings

8. Edit the last request to be as shown:

/* Create rest of assembly drawings */ set_drawing_type(assembly) set_drawing_attributes(INCOMPLETE) set_filter(standard) create_drawings()

Save the wizard file

9. Click Save to save the changes and to close the text editor

A wizard file is comprised of several sets of drawing requests. The order of these requests is important, since Tekla Structures creates only one drawing for each selected object. The first request that matches the criteria of select filters is applied. Now we want to ensure that the new wizard file functions correctly.
Apply own wizard file

1. Delete all of the assembly drawings in the drawing list. 2. Open the Wizard dialog box, select the ASSEMBLY_TR wizard and click Create from all.

3. Check the drawing list to see that correct drawing properties were used: The titles of the created assembly drawings INCOMPLETE bracing_V, bracing_H

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

32

11.5

Edit Drawings Manually

It is easy to manually add, delete and edit drawing objects (i.e. dimensions, lines, text, symbols, graphics and marks) in Tekla Structures drawings.

Most drawing objects (both automatically and manually created) are associative and automatically update if the model changes. However some manually created drawing objects such as lines, polygons, and circles are yet not associative. We will now edit one brace_H drawing manually to include the same editing that we defined for the vertical brace_V drawing properties (the bolt distance dimensions the rectangular part mark frame, and single part views).
Add bolt distance dimensions

1. Open the first bracing_H drawing in the drawing list 2. Click on the Create Y dimension icon

3. Pick the center points of bolts to be dimensioned 4. Move the cursor to where you want the dimension to appear and click on the middle mouse button

The associative symbols indicates which drawing objects are associated to the model and will be updated if the model is changed

Click SHIFT+A in the keyboard to display/hide the associative symbols

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

33

To move the dimension: select it and drag it to the desired position

Add the bolt dimension to the other end in the same way.
Change the frame of part marks

1. Double-click one of the part marks to open the Part mark properties dialog box. 2. On the General tab, change the Frame around mark to rectangular and tick only this check box. 3. Select all the part marks in the drawing. (You can use the Select part mark select switch.)

4. Modify

Now all the part marks in the drawing have rectangular frames.
Include single part views

1. Using the CTRL key select each plate part in the drawing. 2. Right-click and select Create single part views from the popup menu.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

34

3. Close the drawing, click Save and Freeze in the confirmation dialog box

When you close a drawing that has been changed, Tekla Structures prompts you to save the drawing. Whenever you have manually edited the drawing it is recommended to select Save and Freeze. This way you will systematically freeze edited drawings and only them. An F appears in the drawing list to show this drawing is frozen. Now this one horizontal brace drawing has roughly the same editing as all the vertical brace drawings. The difference is that part of this horizontal brace drawing editing was done manually. If we wanted the rest of the horizontal brace drawings to have the same editing, we could repeat the manual editing to them one by one. However, changing the bracing_H_TR drawing properties is a better solution.

To get the creation of drawings as automatic as possible, you should find good enough predefined drawing properties to create the drawings with, instead of editing them manually. Whenever there is a need to edit the drawings, you should

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

35

first check if the result can be achieved by changing the drawing properties. As long as you can manage to create complete drawings by using predefined drawing properties the creation and updating off the drawings will be more automatic.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

36

11.6 Update Drawings

We will now modify our model by changing the bolt spacing of all of the gusset plate connections. Changes in the model will result in some of the drawings no longer be up-to-date. To be able to open the drawings you will need to run numbering and update them. We will study how updating effects the edited drawings. Updating will: Switch the P flag on a frozen drawing to an *. This indicates that the drawing has been updated (also manual editing, such as extra marks or dimensions). Regenerate any drawings with a P flag that are unfrozen, with the originally used drawing properties. The updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions, texts etc.). Update the quantities on a drawing with an N flag.

Change the model

Change gusset plate bolt spacing

1. Select all the connections in the model. 2. Find the Tube gusset (20) connection (Ctrl+F), and double-click on it to open it. 3. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box. 4. On the Bracebolts1, Bracebolts2 and Bracebolts3 tab pages, edit the vertical bolt spacing to 80 as shown below.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

37

5. Click Modify Now the model has changed and some of the drawings are no longer up to date. To be able to open the drawings you need to run numbering and update them.

It is not possible to open earlier revisions of the drawings. Due to the integration between drawings and the model a drawing that is not up-todate cannot be opened.
Run numbering

Select Tools > Numbering > Modified. Once the numbering is carried out, the flags in the Drawing list show all those affected drawings that need to be updated.
Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing status flags

You can filter up-to-date drawings with Filter > Up to date button. To get non up to date drawings listed press Display > Invert button after Filter > Up to date.

Update vertical brace drawings

The vertical brace drawings were created with only the predefined drawing attributes. They will be complete right after updating, since they are simply recreated using their own attributes. To update drawings: 1. Select all the bracing_V drawings from the list. 2. Click Update. 3. Open the drawings to see that they are ok

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

38

Update horizontal brace drawing

We will next update all the horizontal brace drawings including the manually edited one. Before updating drawings Make sure that all the drawings having manual editing are Frozen. Updating will regenerate any drawings with a P flag that are unfrozen, the updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions, texts etc.). There is no Undo for the updating the drawings command. 1. Select all the bracing_H drawing from the list except the frozen one. 2. Click Update.

Because a lot of time can be spent editing drawings, it is advisable to always freeze manually edited drawings. If major modifications in the model create problems with a drawing you can always regenerate the drawing with the predefined drawing properties. To consciously override manual modifications in a drawing and regenerate the drawing with predefined drawing properties, you can: 3. Unfreeze the drawing. 4. Update the drawing Or in case the drawing is already up to date: 1. Unfreeze the drawing. 2. Modify it first, using other drawing properties (e.g. No_dimensions) 3. Modify it with the original properties (e.g. bracing_H) Since the drawing is not frozen, the updating regenerates the drawing but deletes all the manual editing (in this case the added bolt dimensions and part mark frame change).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

39

Update frozen horizontal brace drawing

To update frozen drawings: 1. Select the frozen bracing_H drawing from the list. 2. Click Update. 3. The P gets replaced by an *

Check and save the drawing

1. Open the drawing with an *. The dimensions should be correct.

2. Save the drawing, and the * flag is removed

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

40

11.7 Create Drawings Manually

In Tekla Structures, you can create single-part and assembly drawings by loading and applying predefined drawing properties for layout, dimensions, marks, etc. for selected parts. This process is called the manual creation of drawings, in contrast to the drawing creation with wizards. The steps for the manual creation of drawings are basically the same as the steps automatically dine by the drawing wizard: 1. Select the model objects. 2. Load and Apply the predefined drawing properties. 3. Click Drawing > Assembly drawing to create assembly drawings or Drawing > Single-part drawing to create single-part drawingsCreate

assembly

drawings
As an example, we will create assembly drawings of the columns. To manually create assembly drawings of all columns: 1. Open the drawing list and delete all assembly drawings with the title COLUMN.
Create assembly drawings from columns

2. Select the column_filter on the Select switches toolbar and select the whole model. 3. Select Properties > Assembly drawing in the menu to open the Assembly drawing properties dialog box. 4. Select column properties in the drop-down box next to the Load button.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

41

5. Click Load and OK. 6. Select Drawing > Assembly drawing in the menu to create the assembly drawings. 7. Open the drawing list and check that the correct drawings were created. You can also use the view filters in the View filter dialog box (opened from the View properties dialog box) to help selecting members in the model for drawing creation.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Assembly and Single Part Drawings

42

Cast Unit Drawings

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training August 25, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

11

Cast Unit Drawings...................................................................................................... 3

11.1 Create Cast Unit Drawings ........................................................................................................4 Define cast unit drawing properties for beams...........................................................................4 Create a cast unit drawing for a beam .....................................................................................10 Drawing Classifier in beam cast unit drawings ........................................................................11 Define Cast Unit Drawing Properties for Columns...................................................................15 Create Cast Unit Drawings for Columns ..................................................................................15 Create Additional Cast Unit Drawings......................................................................................17 Cloning Drawings ....................................................................................................................20

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Cast Unit Drawings

11

Cast Unit Drawings

In this lesson

In this lesson we will learn how to create cast unit drawings of the concrete members of the model. We will then modify the drawings and use the finished drawings for cloning. You will learn how to: Use your own select filters Define cast unit drawing properties Define Drawing Classifier settings Use the Drawing Classifier Use different drawings of the same cast unit Use cloning Use the drawing list.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

11.1

Create Cast Unit Drawings

Cast unit drawings are

workshop (or in-situ) drawings, in which details of a cast unit, consisting of the concrete parts, reinforcement and components, are presented for fabrication. All of the views in the drawings are current views of the members as they are in the model. When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of these members. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of the identical members. If the "host" member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get a new position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign the original drawing to another member with the original position mark. Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, for example, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the information in the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the parts or bolts from the drawings. You are able to filter out parts and other objects in the drawings, or make them invisible. You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model, Tekla Structures updates the related drawings when you next carry out numbering.

Once the model is numbered it is possible to create cast unit drawings of selected parts in the model. Selecting Cast Unit drawings from the Drawing pull-down menu will generate drawings of the selected parts. However, to get the drawings appear as complete as possible, it is a good idea to create drawings of certain cast units with suitable properties predefined for them. There are two options for cast unit drawing specification. The possible options to select are By cast unit position or By cast unit ID. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Getting
Started with Drawings > Creating drawings > Creating castunit drawings.

Define cast unit drawing properties for beams

We will now define cast unit drawing properties for a beam, which has reinforcements included.
Set the common drawing properties

1. From the pull-down menu select Properties > Cast unit drawing...

2. Select By cast unit position as the cast unit definition method.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

3. Type BEAM REINFORCEMENT into the Name field. This text will appear in the drawing list.
Set the layout properties

We will next define drawings size, layout and view projection. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Layout > Drawing size and Drawing > Drawing Layout > Scale and location of drawing views > Location of views in drawings. Look also at lesson 10 for layouts. 4. Click on the Layout button. 5. Select Size definition mode to be Autosize. 6. Select Calculated/fixed sizes in Autosize > Use option menu.

7. Select the Scale tab page. 8. Set Autoscale to No. 9. Select the Other tab page. 10. Select Projection type to be First angle (also referred to as European projection). 11. Set Yes to Side views beside main. 12. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 13. Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Set the view properties

Next we will define which views will be created to the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties > Drawing view properties. 1. Click on the View button.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

2. Turn back and bottom views off, all other views to on or auto. 3. Select the Attributes tab. Set Scale to 1:20. All views of a view type share the same scale. 5. Set Coordinate system to local. 6. Set rotation to 0 in all directions. 7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Set the part properties

Next we will define how the parts will be presented in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties > Drawing view properties. 1. Click on the Part button. 2. Set Part representation to Exact. 3. Set Hidden lines on and Center line and Reference lines off. 4. Select the Appearance tab. 5. For Visible lines, select color, which is weighted 0.3 mm. For all other lines, select line weight 0.1 mm.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

Color weight is defined in plotter catalog: File > Catalog > Plotters > Modify > Color table... See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Printing > The plotter catalog > Color. 6. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 7. Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Set the dimensioning properties

Next we will define how the parts will be dimensioned in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Dimensioning. 1. Click on the Dimensioning button. 2. Set Number of views > Minimize and Combine dimensions > Options to No.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

3. Select the Part dimensions tab page. 4. Set part dimensions as below:

5. Select the Position dimensions tab page. 6. Set Position to: to Main part. 7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Close the dialog by clicking OK.
Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation T Cast Unit Drawings

Set the reinforcing properties

Next we will define how the reinforcements will be represented in the drawing. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties > Reinforcement in
drawings.

1. Click on the Reinforcement button. 2. Set the Visibility of all reinforcing bars to Visible. 3. Set the Representation to single line. 4. Set the Visibility of reinforcing bars in group to all.

5. Select the Bar appearance tab page. 6. Select color, which is weighted 0.3 mm. Color weight is defined in plotter catalog: File > Catalog > Plotters >Modify> Color table... See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Printing > The plotter catalog > Color. We will first present all reinforcements with the same color and modify it later. 7. Enter the name Beam in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Close the dialog by clicking OK. 9. All other object can use standard settings. Now save these settings. Enter the name Beam-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. Apply all settings and close the dialog by clicking OK.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

Create a cast unit drawing for a beam

We will first create one cast unit drawing for a beam, which contains reinforcements, using the predefined attribute values. Then we will edit the settings and use them in new drawings for other beams with the help of Drawing Classifier.
Create a cast unit drawing

1. Select a beam on gridline 7, between lines A and C.

2. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from the drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected beam using the predefined attribute values and it appears in the drawing list, which can be opened from Drawing > List See

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

10

more about the drawing list in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Getting Started with Drawings > Opening drawings > Drawing list and Lesson 10.

Open the cast unit drawing for editing

Select the drawing from the list and click on the Open button. Tekla Structures opens the Beam reinforcement drawing for editing. You can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels: Drawing properties View properties Object properties For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see Tekla Structures help: Help: Drawing > Introduction to drawings > Three levels of editing drawings Help: Drawing > Drawing Properties and Lesson 10.

Drawing Classifier in beam cast unit drawings

Define Drawing Classifier settings
We will use Drawing Classifier to represent the different reinforcements with different line settings. By default, all reinforcements use the same line settings and for clearer representation it is good to show different reinforcement with different line styles and weights. The Classifier makes use of the Drawing and View Filter, the Drawing and View Properties and Property Attribute sub-dialogs. See more in Tekla Structures Help:
Drawing > Drawing Properties > The Drawing Classifier > Using the classifier.

To change properties of a single view of a multiple view drawing, edit and save View properties rather than Drawing properties. Once the properties have been set up and saved they can be applied in automatic drawing creation in normal ways.
Create view filters

We will first define the filter settings for different reinforcements. Tekla Structures uses filters for selecting objects in drawing views with certain criteria. 1. Double-click on any view border to open the View properties dialog. 2. Click the Filter... button to open the View filter properties dialog box. 3. Select the Reinforcing bars tab page. 4. Type BOTTOM_BAR TOP_BAR in the Reinforcing bar Name field. Note that there is an empty space between the names to separate them.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

11

5. Save the filter settings with name Main_Bars in the Save as field. 6. Write then PNL to the Reinforcing bar Name field. 7. Enter the name Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Next write STIRRUP to the Reinforcing bar Name field. 9. Enter the name Stirrups in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 10. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Do not click Apply or OK, as this will apply the current filter to the entire drawing and the Classifier will not work. We have now defined three different filters for different kind of reinforcements.
Define reinforcement appearance

Next, we will define the appearance settings for the reinforcements. 1. Click on the Reinforcement... button to open the View reinforcing bar properties dialog box. 2. Select the Bar appearance tab page. 3. Select color, which is weighted 0.5 mm (blue color). 4. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Main_Bars in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for main bars. The name consists of three sections. First there must be the text "filter". Then the drawing or view attribute file name in this case "Beam-Reinforcement" (the saved settings of drawing or view main dialog). The last section is the name of the filter attribute file in this case "Main_Bars". The sections are combined with underscores. 5. Next select the Bar content tab page. 6. Select filled line as the Representation type.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

12

7. Select straight line as symbol at reinforcement ends. 8. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for main bars. 9. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. We now have drawing classifier settings for main reinforcements and lifting hooks, stirrups can use Beam-Reinforcement settings.
Define reinforcement mark content

Before modifying the drawing, we will add drawing classifier settings for pullout pictures of stirrup reinforcement marks. 1. Click on the Reinforcement marks button to open the View reinforcing bar mark properties dialog box. 2. Select the Pullout picture from Available elements list on Single mark tab page.

3. Click on the Add> button. Pullout picture dialog opens. 4. Tick the Dimensions and Bending angle, then click OK. 5. Then, select Group above the Elements in mark list.

6. Repeat steps 2 4 to add the Pullout picture for reinforcement group mark. 7. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Stirrups in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for stirrup reinforcements. 8. Then remove all elements from Elements in mark list. 9. Select Name from Available elements list and click on the Add> button. 10. Select Diameter from Available elements list and click on the Add> button.
Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation T Cast Unit Drawings

13

11. Enter the name filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the property file for lifting hooks. 12. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Use Drawing Classifier to Edit the Drawing

Now, all drawing classifier settings are ready for use. We will first modify the drawing which is already open.
Modify the drawing

1. Close all view dialogs by clicking Cancel. 2. Double-click on any empty space to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 3. Click Modify. Tekla Structures edits the picture using drawing classifier settings.

Main reinforcement bars are now represented with line weighted 0.5 mm, lifting hooks with filled line having name + diameter in the mark, and stirrups have a pullout picture in the mark. 4. Now, close the drawing saving it.

Use the Drawing Classifier to Create New Drawings

Next we will create new drawings of rest of the concrete beams with the same Drawing Classifier settings. 1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 2. Select Beam_Reinforcement drawing settings from pull-down menu list. 3. Click on the Load button.
Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation T Cast Unit Drawings

14

4. Click OK to apply the settings and to close the dialog. 5. Select BEAM_CONCRETE select filter.

6. Make an area select of the whole model. All concrete beams will be selected. 7. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing. Tekla Structures generates cast unit drawings of the selected beams using drawing classifier settings for reinforced beams and they appear in the drawing list with title BEAM REINFORCEMENT.

Define Cast Unit Drawing Properties for Columns

Using the settings for beam cast unit drawing as basis, we will next define drawing settings for columns and generate cast unit drawings of them. 1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 2. Select the Beam-Reinforcement from saved attributes list and click Load. 3. Change the name field to COLUMN REINFORCEMENT. 4. Enter the name Column-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.
Set the dimensioning attributes

Next we add elevation dimensioning to the dimensioning settings. See more in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Dimensioning. 1. Click on the Dimensioning button. 2. Select the Beam from saved attributes list and click Load. 3. Select the Position dimensions tab page. 4. Set the Elevation dimensions to On. 5. Enter the name Column-Reinforcement in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 6. Close the dialog by clicking OK. 7. All other objects can use standard or Beam-reinforcement settings. Now save these settings by clicking Save as in the main dialog. Apply all setting and close the dialog by clicking OK.

Create Cast Unit Drawings for Columns

We will first create one cast unit drawing for a column which has reinforcements, using the predefined attribute values. Then we will modify the settings and use them in new drawings for other columns with help of the drawing classifier. 1. Select the column on grid intersection A7. 2. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected column.
Modify the Drawing Classifier settings

We will next modify the Drawing Classifier settings for columns: 1. Open the column cast unit drawing. 2. Double-click on any view border to open the View properties dialog box.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

15

3. Open the Reinforcement properties dialog by clicking Reinforcement 4. Select filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Main_Bars from pull-down list and click on the Load button. 5. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_Main_Bars in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 6. Then load the settings of filter_Beam-Reinforcement_Lifting_Hooks. 7. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_ Lifting_Hooks in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 8. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. We will next add part mark settings for column shoes. First we need to define the filter for components. 1. In View properties dialog, click Filter 2. As all parts inside the components have class number 100, we can use that for filtering. Enter 100 into Class field on Parts tab page. 3. Enter the name component in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Next we will define part mark settings for Drawing Classifier, using the component filter. 1. In the View properties dialog, click Part mark 2. Remove all elements from Elements in mark list, both for main part and secondary part. 3. Enter the name filter_Column-Reinforcement_component in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

16

4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box. 5. Double-click on any empty space to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 6. Click Modify. Tekla Structures edits the picture using drawing classifier settings. 7. Close the drawing and save it.
Use Drawing Classifier to create new drawings

We will now create cast unit drawings for all concrete columns with the drawing classifier settings. 1. Select COLUMN_CONCRETE select filter. 2. Make an area select of the whole model. All concrete columns will be selected. 3. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing. Tekla Structures generates cast unit drawings of the selected beams using drawing classifier settings for reinforced beams and they appear in the drawing list with title COLUMN REINFORCEMENT.

Create Additional Cast Unit Drawings

You can create two or more cast unit drawings from the same cast unit. Drawing might be produced as three separate smaller size drawings i.e. One including main geometry + embeddings + dimension lines, one having Reinforcement, another Surface finishing (tiles etc.). Alternatively, you can add several new views from the same cast unit to an existing drawing using Create > View > Basic > Front, Up, Back or Down commands.
Set the drawing attributes

First, we need to define the drawing settings. 1. Select Properties > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu to open the Cast unit drawing properties dialog. 2. Select the Column-Reinforcement from saved attributes list and click Load. 3. Change the name field to COLUMN DIMENSIONS.

4. Enter number 2 to the Sheet number field. Every additional cast unit drawing of the same cast unit must have a different sheet number.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

17

5. Enter the name Column-Dimensions in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 6. Click on the Reinforcement button. 7. Set the visibility of reinforcing bars to Not visible. 8. Enter the name Column-Dimensions in the text box next to the Save as button, then click Save as to save the settings. 9. Close the dialog by clicking OK. 10. Now save these settings by clicking Save as in the main dialog. Apply all setting and close the dialog by clicking OK.
Generate an additional cast unit drawing

We will now create a dimensioning drawing of one column. 1. Select a column on gridlines 1 and C intersection. 2. Select Drawing > Cast unit drawing from drop-down menu. A cast unit drawing is created of the selected column. The drawing appears in the drawing list with title COLUMN DIMENSIONS. The drawing name has a new sheet number.

Edit the additional cast unit drawing

We will next edit the dimensioning drawing and add there also details for connecting parts. For this create basic views of them by selecting part and right-click > Create view > Part basic views. 1. Open the cast unit drawing. 2. We will first add running dimensions for corbel. Double-click on the Create x dimension icon to open the dialog. 3. Select straight dimensioning to option, which has running dimensions. 4. On the Appearance tab select arrow shape to be filled arrow.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

18

5. Click OK. 6. Click the corner points of the column and the corbel, end with middle button.

Next add part mark for bearing pad. 1. Select the bearing pad. 2. Right-click > Part mark. 3. Double-click on the part mark to open the Part mark properties dialog. 4. Remove all elements from Elements in mark list. 5. Add Name and Material to Elements in mark list. 6. Select the elements and click <Add frame.

7. Click Modify.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

19

We will now add part basic views to the drawing to show the connecting structures. 1. In Create pulldown menu select View > From model > View. 2. Select the Part end view of the pad footing. Tekla Structures generates a new view to the drawing. 3. Right-click at any empty space and select Place views command. The views are rearranged in the drawing. 4. Remove unnecessary part marks from the view by selecting them and by clicking on the Delete button. 5. Double-click on the view border and select Part. 6. Set hidden lines visible and click Modify.

7. Add needed dimensions using dimensioning tools. 8. Close the drawing saving it.

Cloning Drawings
We will next clone the additional cast unit drawing for columns on gridline F. You can clone drawings to produce cast unit drawings of same or similar cast units. You should consider cloning drawings when: 1. There are several almost similar parts or cast units in the model. 2. You need to produce several cast unit drawings of same cast unit. 3. The drawings need a lot of manual editing. See more about cloning in Tekla Structures Help: Drawing > Getting started with drawings > Drawing reference > Drawing>Clone drawing. Steps to clone drawings:

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

20

1. Finalize, save, and close the drawing you want to clone. 2. In the model, select cast units to include in the drawing. 3. Click Drawing > List... to open the drawing list. 4. Select the finalized drawing on the drawing list. 5. Click Clone...

6. In the Drawing cloning dialog box, select the drawing objects in the finalized drawing that you want to copy into the new drawing. If you want Tekla Structures to red circle the dimensions for which it cannot find a reference point on a part, select the Indicate dimension points that need checking checkbox. 7. Click Clone selected. Always check dimensions and drawing view sizes in cloned drawings.

You can have Tekla Structures to indicate the dimension points that need to be checked. Select the checkbox Indicate dimension points that need checking in the Drawing cloning dialog box. Tekla Structures circles in red the dimensions for which it cannot find a reference point on a part. To remove the red circles in cloned drawings, do one of the following:
circle > Single circle and

To remove one circle, in the Drawing Editor, click Edit > Remove dimension point select the circle to remove.

To remove all circles, click Edit > Remove dimension point circle > All. Create a new dimension point (Edit > Add dimension point) at the correct position and delete the existing dimension point (Edit > Remove dimension point). When you delete incorrect dimensions the red circles will also disappear. You can then recreate the dimensions.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

21

In order to add and remove dimension points and to remove dimension point circles, you may have to adjust the drawing view size so that the dimension points are inside the view.

Copyright 2004 Tekla Corporation

T Cast Unit Drawings

22

General Arrangement Drawings

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training March 18, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

12

General Arrangement (GA) Drawings........................................................................ 3

12.1 Creating GA Drawings ...............................................................................................................3 12.2 Editing GA Drawings................................................................................................................22 12.3 Updating GA Drawings ............................................................................................................27

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

12 General Arrangement (GA) Drawings

In this lesson

We will look more closely at the features of general arrangement (GA) drawings in Tekla Structures. We will create GA drawings, modify and update them. We will also introduce tools for adding details and section views to the drawings. A general introduction to GA drawings and an example of creating GA drawings is presented in the Lesson 10 Principles of working with drawings. Also see the help file for more information Help: Drawing > Getting Started with Drawings > General
arrangement drawings...

12.1 Creating GA Drawings

We will now create general arrangement drawings from the following Basic Model 1-2 views: 3D view Elevation views from grids A, F, 1, 4, 7 Foundation plan We will also add a few details to the GA drawing.

Adjust model views for GA drawings

Before we start linking model views to the GA drawing, we need to review the views and, if necessary, modify or create new model views.
Modify 3d view

1. Open the 3D view. 2. Double-click in the view background and click the Filter button in the View properties dialog.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

3. Filter out profiles D64*, P18*, 175* -> click Modify. (If you have a concrete frame, also set the display not to show reinforcements in the View setup dialog, which opens by clicking Display in the View properties dialog.) 4. Rotate the 3D view to you liking (Ctrl + middle mouse button).

The 3D view will appear in the GA drawing in the same rotation angle as it is in the model view.

5. Close the view. 6. Check that other model views (grid A, F, 1, 4, 7 and plan 0) are displaying the necessary information: Filter unnecessary parts out.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

Restrict work area to show only the part of the model you want visible (fit work area / pick work area). Rotate 3D views to your liking. Make sure that the plan and elevation views are in 2D mode.

E.g. Foundation plane (view Plan 0).

E.g. Elevation at gridline 4.

Create detail model views

Create connection basic views

We can add any existing view to a GA drawing. We will now create detail views of two steel connections, or, in case you have modeled a concrete frame, of two concrete connections. Follow the corresponding instructions.
TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Detail views of steel connections:

1. Highlight the connection symbols at grid intersection A4 at the +13400 elevation.

Detail views of concrete connections:

1. Highlight the connection symbol at grid intersection A7 at the +7350 elevation.

2. Right-click and select: Create view > Component basic view.

2. Right-click and select: Create view > Component basic view.

3. Filter out all concrete parts from the view.

3. Filter out or hide the slabs. Use Shift+2 to show the connection in shaded wireframe, but the rest in rendered view.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

4. Rotate the 3D view so that you get the best view of the connections.

4. Rotate the 3D view so that you get the best view of the connection.

5. Double-click on the background of the basic view and change the name of the view to (e.g. gridline location) Connection A/4 @ Roof level.

5. Double-click on the background of the basic view and change the name of the view to (e.g. gridline location) Connection A/7 @ level +7350.

6. Click Modify. 7. The view title bar is changed according to the name (Connection A/4 @ Roof level). You should also see this view in the Open named view list. Create a similar detail view from the connection at grid intersection B4 at the Roof level.

6. Click Modify. 7. The view title bar is changed according to the name (Connection A/7 @ level +7350). You should also see this view in the Open named view list. Create a similar detail view from the connection at grid intersection B7 at the same level.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

Setup GA drawing properties

Set drawing properties

Before we can start creating GA drawings we need to setup the drawing properties. See the online help files for more details.
Help: Drawing > Getting started with Drawings > Drawing reference > General arrangement drawing...

1. Select Drawing > General arrangement drawing

2. In the Create general arrangement drawing dialog box click Drawing properties

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

3. Change the following attributes for the 3D GA drawing: Change name to 3D (Name field) View scale to 1:100 (View button) Turn off gridlines (Grid button) Turn off center lines (Part button) Turn off welds (Weld button). If you have modeled a concrete frame, instead, turn off reinforcing bars (Reinforcement button).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

4. Click OK in each child dialog box to lock the settings. And then click OK to in the main GA drawing properties dialog to lock all the settings.

Create a GA drawing from one model view

We will create a general arrangement drawing from the 3D model view using the drawing properties set in a previous chapter.
Create drawing out of 3D view

1. Select 3d view from the Create general arrangement drawing dialog.

2. Check-mark Open Drawing. 3. Click Create. In a few moments Tekla Structures opens a drawing created from the 3D view.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

10

Create a GA drawing using more than one model view

Now we will create another GA drawing using more than one model view and automatically bring those views into the GA drawing.
Adjust drawing properties

1. Click the Drawing properties button in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog, and change the following: Change the name to Elevation @ Grid 4 (Name field) Change drawing size to 830*287 (Layout dialog) 2. Click on OK for each of the dialogs to lock the settings.

Create drawing out of Grid view and detail

To create GA drawing using more than one model view: 1. Highlight view GRID 4 and one of the two connection views you created earlier. 2. Select All selected views to one drawing. 3. Check mark Open drawing. 4. Click Create.

In a few moments Tekla Structures opens the GA drawing with the selected model views.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

11

5. Double-click on the blue border of the main view. In the View properties dialog box, change the following: Turn on the gridlines (Grid button) Set the part marks visibility to distributed (Part mark > General) Turn off the part marks out of the view plane (Part mark -> General) 6. Double-click on the blue border of the detail and change the following: Change the scale to 1:20 (Scale field) Change the bolt mark visibility to distributed (Bolt part -> General)

7. Close the drawing. If part or bolt mark visibility properties are set to something other than None and another view is added to drawing, all the deleted part marks will reappear.

Add another model view to an existing GA drawing

We will now create another detail for the Grid 4 drawing using the same view properties as the existing detail.
Link another model view to GA drawing

1. Open a model view at the second connection you created a view of (for steel frame connection at B/4 @ Roof level, for concrete frame B/7 @ level +7350). 2. Open GA drawing Elevation @ Grid 4. 3. Double-click on the Create view from model view icon to open the view properties.

4. Click Interrupt (right mouse click > Interrupt).

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

12

5. Highlight the border of existing detail. 6. Click Get on View properties dialog. 7. Click OK. 8. Activate the Create view from model view command again by clicking the icon. 9. Minimize the drawing. 10. Pick the connection view. 11. Maximize the drawing and the detail will have appeared at the bottom left hand corner of the drawing. 12. Move the view from bottom left hand corner to a better location.

Create a detail from the drawing view

Now we will create one more detail for the Grid 4 drawing, so keep the drawing open.
Create another detail

1. Double-click on the Create view from view icon.

2. In the View properties dialog, change the scale to 1/20. 3. Click OK. 4. Select an area near the footing at gridline A as shown below.

5. The detail should now appear on the drawing. 6. Right-click and select Place views, or place the view manually.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

13

7. Close the drawing. If the existing drawing view is in a 3D view, it is difficult to pick the area. Usually, it is easier to create another view in the model and link that model view to a drawing as explained earlier.

Create multiple GA drawings automatically

Now we will create multiple general arrangement drawings automatically using grid views A, F, 1 and 4.
Change drawing properties

1. Click the Drawing properties button in the Create general arrangement drawing dialog and change the following: Change the name to Elevation @ Grid (Name field) Turn on gridlines (Grid button) 2. Click OK for each of the dialogs to lock the settings.

Create GA drawings out of grid views

To create multiple GA drawings out of multiple model views: 1. Highlight views GRID A, GRID F, GRID 1 and GRID 7. 2. From the list box, select One drawing per view. 3. Click Create.

You will get 4 GA drawings.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

14

We still need to modify the GA drawing names. 1. Open the first drawing on the list.

2. Check the view title to see which gridline it represents. 3. Double-click on the background of the drawing to open the drawing properties. 4. Change the name to, e.g., Elevation @ Grid F.

5. Click Modify and the name changes on the list. 6. Repeat for the rest of the drawings.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

15

Create an empty GA drawing and add model views interactively

In certain situations (multi-user for example) it is necessary to first create empty GA drawings and later link the model views interactively. By using this method each user can have GA drawings reserved for their use.
Change drawing properties

1. Click the Drawing properties button on the Create general arrangement drawing dialog, and change the following: Change the name to Foundation (Name field) Change the drawing size to 830*584 (Layout dialog) Set the part marks visibility to none (Part mark -> General) Set the part marks out of view plane not visible(Part mark -> General) 2. Click the OK button for each of the dialogs to lock the settings.

Create empty GA drawing

To create an empty GA drawing and add the model view interactively: 1. Open the model view, Plan +0. 2. Open the GA drawing creation dialog, Drawing > Create general arrangement drawing. 3. Select Empty drawing from the drop down menu. 4. Check-mark Open drawing. 5. Click Create.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

16

Link model view to drawing

1. Open the drawing. 2. Minimize the drawing. 3. Double-click on the Create view from model view icon.

4. Change the scale to 1/100. 5. Click OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

17

6. Pick the model view. 7. Maximize the drawing and the model view has been placed on the drawing. 8. Right-click and select Place views.

Create a detail using area select

We will now create detail from the footing at A/1.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

18

Create detail

1. Minimize the drawing again. 2. Double-click on the icon Create view from model by area.

3. Change scale to 1/20. 4. Click OK. 5. Pick area around the footing at grid intersection A/1.

6. Maximize the drawing and the view will have been placed on the drawing. 7. Right-click and select Place views.

Create a section view out of a detail

Now we will create section view from the footing detail that we created earlier.
Create section view

1. Double-click on the icon Create section view.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

19

2. Change scale to 1/20 in the view properties dialog. 3. Click OK. 4. Pick the section view area as shown below:
With points 1 and 2 you will show the location and direction of the cut line. Then with points 3 and 4 you will show the depth and width of the section view, so a pick box which is big enough that all of the necessary parts fit inside.

The section view and cut symbols will appear.

The section view height is same as model height.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

20

1. Double-click on the section view blue border. 2. Change the height by changing the y max: value from 13400 to 500.

3. Click Modify. 4. Left-click the background of the drawing once and then right-click and select Place
views.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

21

12.2 Editing GA Drawings

Next we will do some editing to the GA drawings. Most of the editing is done exactly like it is done in other types of drawings see: Help: Drawing > Editing
Drawings.

Interactive dimensioning
For more information about the different dimensioning tools, see: Help: Drawing >
Dimensioning > Dimension basics > Manual dimensioning.

Automatic grid dimensions

Grids can be dimensioned with just a couple of clicks:
Dimension grids

1. Open the Foundation GA drawing. 2. Go to Create > Dimension > Grid.

3. Pick the main drawing view. 4. Grid dimensions will appear. 5. You can pick and move dimension lines anywhere you want them.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

22

Semi-automatic GA dimensioning
See the online help file for more information about setting up dimensioning properties Help: Drawings > Dimensioning > Dimension reference > Setup>GA dimensioning.
Dimension silos

1. From the menu, select Setup > GA dimensioning 2. Set the properties as shown below:

3. Select the silos.

4. Right-click and select Dimension Parts XY.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

23

5. Dimension lines from the silos to gridlines appear.

In the same fashion we can also dimension the anchor bolts:

Dimension anchor bolt detail

1. Highlight the parts in the anchor bolt detail. 2. Right-click and select Dimension Parts XY.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

24

And in the section view:

Dimension anchor bolt cut view

3. Double-click on the blue border to open the view properties. 4. Click on the Part button, check-mark Hidden lines: to on and click Modify. 5. Highlight just the anchor bolts and the footing. 6. Right-click and select Dimension Parts XY.

7. Close the drawing.

Create a level mark

A level mark can be inserted at any picked point in the drawing and it will automatically give you the elevation of that point.
Create level mark

1. Click the Create level mark icon.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

25

2. Right-click and use the Near snap override to pick a point at the top of the foundation. 3. Freely pick another point to set the direction of the level mark. 4. The level mark will appear at the selected location.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

26

12.3 Updating GA Drawings

GA drawings are automatically updated when you make changes to the model. However, GA drawing marks are not automatically updated. You need to update these by pressing the Update marks button in the drawing list before opening the drawing.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING General Arrangement Drawings

27

Project Manager

Tekla Structures 11.0 Basic Training August 16, 2005

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

Contents

Contents..................................................................................................................................i

Project Manager ...........................................................................................................3

1.1 1.2 About Tekla Structures Project Manager...................................................................................4 Working with Views ...................................................................................................................5 Open the model.........................................................................................................................5 Open the view list ......................................................................................................................6 Create plane views along gridlines ............................................................................................7 Create a true plan view..............................................................................................................9 Examine the Model..................................................................................................................12 Zooming and rotating...............................................................................................................12 Displaying and hiding objects in the view ................................................................................13 Using and defining select filters...............................................................................................14 Check objects by phases.........................................................................................................17 Lotting and Sequencer ............................................................................................................19 Lotting......................................................................................................................................19 Sequencer ...............................................................................................................................22 Attributes and Attribute Import.................................................................................................24 4D Tool....................................................................................................................................28 Select parts from model using reports .....................................................................................29 Export updated dates ..............................................................................................................31 The 4D dialog ..........................................................................................................................31 How to Show your Model to Others.........................................................................................33 Taking snapshots ....................................................................................................................33 Publishing the model as a web page .......................................................................................36 Reports....................................................................................................................................38 Study different reports and check part marks ..........................................................................41 Create reports .........................................................................................................................42 Other checks ...........................................................................................................................42 Drawings .................................................................................................................................43

1.3

1.4

1.5 1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

Project Manager

In this lesson

In this lesson we will go through the basic functionalities of Tekla Structures Project Manager. We will open a model and examine it in different ways. We will also learn how to use the 4D tool in different ways. Then we will import attributes, learn to use the 4D tool and learn to make some reports. In the first section, we will briefly discuss some of the ways to utilize Tekla Structures Project Manager to give you an idea of the possibilities there are. In this lesson, you will learn how to: Create views Examine the model Create lots and sequences Import attributes Use the 4D tool Create your own reports Check drawings.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

1.1 About Tekla Structures Project Manager

What is Project Manager?

What is Project Manager? For whom is it intended? What are the benefits? Tekla Structures Project Manager is add-on software of Tekla Structures to followup the status of the project and review changes that have occurred during a project. It is a means to ensure that the information flow is efficient, both if your company is alone on the project or if there are multiple companies involved. In Tekla Structures Project Manager, you can contain the follow-up information for the total structural engineering project from conceptual design to fabrication and erection. In case there is one company involved, it might be the drawing office manager, the fabrication manager, and the account manager who use the program. In case there are several companies involved, it could be the owners, the customers, the fabrication managers, the chief engineers, the project managers, and the drawing office managers who use the program.

What do you use Project Manager for?

What do you use Project Manager for? How do you manage your project with Project Manager? The project manager can assign parts of the project to different persons or to other organizations and then follow-up and update the status. You can add project data to the structural objects or groups of objects. You can follow-up your project visually: you can view different parts in your model by highlighting according to certain criteria or status. You can make reports based on the project status, parties involved, dates, etc. You can publish your project model on the Web to other parties. You can share your model by collaboration: multi-user, share your model. You can do status tracking, scheduling, task assignments, visualization, reporting of structure. You can view and check drawings.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

1.2 Working with Views

In Tekla Structures, you work in views. Each view has properties which define its appearance. In this section, we will learn to open the model to use the view list and to create some new views.

Open the model

Open the model Lesson_PM.
Open a model

1. Select File > Open from the pull-down menu or click the Open icon in the Standard toolbar to open the Open model dialog box.

2. In the Model directories list, select Lesson_PM.

3. Click the OK button to open the model.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

Open the view list

You look at the model in different views. If there are already views created in your model, you can find them by clicking the Open named view list icon:
Open the view list

1. Click on the Open named view list icon.

The Views dialog box opens.

This list contains all the created views. All invisible named views are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

If the list is empty, you must create your own elevation and plan views.

Create plane views along gridlines

We will now learn to create Elevation and Plan views along the grid lines created in the previous section. A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in its own window inside the Tekla Structures window. Each view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellow crosses. Points outside the view plane appear as red dots. For more information, see: Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views.
Create grid views

To create views along grid lines, 1. Select one gridline. 2. Right-click and select Create view > Grid views from the pop-up menu to open the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

3. Click the Show button of the XY view plane to open the View properties dialog box. 4. Change the Angle and View depth values as shown below and click OK to close the dialog box.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

5. Select the number of views as All and click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box. The Views dialog box appears presenting all the created views. All invisible named views are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right.

For more information on view properties, see:

Help: Modeling > Getting started > Views > View properties
Display or hide views

To display or hide views: 1. Click the Open named view list icon to open the Views dialog box (which is now already open).
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

2. Select one or several views you want to display or hide. To select several views, use Ctrl and Shift keys. 3. Use the arrows to move views from left to right (visible) or vice versa (invisible).

Do not keep too many views open at the same time. Nine is the maximum number of open views. You can open or close named views by clicking the Open named view list icon. Delete unnecessary views from the view list. To switch between views, press Ctrl+Tab.

Create a true plan view

Often, we need to create other views than grid views. In addition to creating grid views, we can create views with two points or with three points, part or component basic views, or views to part planes: either top, front, back or bottom. Let's create a view that is parallel to the roof slope by creating a view to the top or the rafter on gridline 1. 1. Select View > Create view > To part plane > Top.

2. Select the rafter on gridline 1.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

The new view appears.

3. Double-click on the background. 4. Define the name TRUE PLAN_ROOF for the new view, change the view depth and click Modify.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

10

The new view appears on the view list.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

11

1.3 Examine the Model

Zooming and rotating
You can zoom in and out in several ways. You can click the Page Up or Page Down keys or, if you have a wheel mouse, scroll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out.
Practice zooming

1. Press the Page Up and Page Down keys to see how the zooming works. 2. If you have a wheel mouse: Scroll the mouse wheel forward to zoom in. Scroll the mouse wheel backward to zoom out. You can rotate the model in a 3D view with rendered view type. 1. Hold down the Ctrl key, and click and drag with the middle mouse button. 2. To change the center of rotation, press the key v. 3. In the view, pick a center of rotation. 4. Again, hold down the Ctrl key, and click and drag with the middle mouse button.

Rotate the model

Change between 3D / Plane

With the shortcut Ctrl+P you can change the view angle between 3D and Plane, which is very useful.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

12

Displaying and hiding objects in the view

Object representation

To define which objects are visible and how they are displayed in a view: 1. Double-click on the view. 2. In the View properties dialog box, click Display... . The View setup dialog box appears. 3. Set the visibility and representation for different objects and for components. Try, for example, to hide cuts, fittings and component symbols.

4. Click Modify. To more precisely define which objects are displayed in a view, use the view filter. In the View filter dialog box you can define the visible objects in the view according to their properties. To filter out all concrete parts from the view: 1. Double-click the view. 2. In the View properties dialog box, click Filter... . 3. In the View filter dialog box, select the Parts tab, check Material, also the not box, and write K* in the Filter string field.

Filtering objects

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

13

4. Click Modify.

Using and defining select filters

Tekla Structures includes some select filters, such as beam filter, column filter and plate filter. You can, however, easily create your own select filters, too (see below).
Use select filter to hide parts

1. Select the select filter called beam_filter on the select filter list.

2. Make an area selection by dragging the mouse, selecting the whole model. The beams become highlighted. 3. Right-click and select hide. All beams are hidden.

To display hidden objects again, select the view (the view is selected when it is blue), right-click anywhere on the blue background and select Redraw window!

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

14

Define your own select filters

To make the selecting of parts easier, we will define select filters for each part type. We will use the name of the part as the filtering criteria. This name is the one that is defined in the Properties dialogs of the parts, see below.

To view the Properties dialog of an object, select the object, right-click and select Properties .

For steel/concrete beams and columns we will add also the material as the filtering criteria to be able to filter them separately. Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Filter > Select filter
Define select filter for footing

1. Click the Display select filter dialog icon to open the Select filter dialog box.

2. Load the standard filter to turn out all the possible filtering. 3. Enter name FOOTING in the Name field of Parts tab. 4. Enter name FOOTING in the Save as field and click Save as. You can now choose the new filter from the drop down list.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

15

By following the procedure above define select filters for: Slabs Hollowcore slabs Silos
Define Select filter for plates

To define select filters for plates created both manually and by the connections: 1. Enter name *PLATE* in the Name field of Parts tab.
(*PLATE* matches all parts of which name includes word PLATE)

2. Enter name PLATE in the Save as field and click Save as

Define Select filter for steel beams

To define select filters for Steel Beams: 3. Enter the name BEAM in the Name field of Parts tab. 4. Enter S* in the Material field of Parts tab.
(S* matches all materials with a material name that begins with the characters S)

5. Enter name BEAM_STEEL in the Save as field and click Save as. By following the procedure above define select filters for: Concrete beams Steel columns Concrete columns

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

16

Save the model

Finally save the model.

Check objects by phases

In Tekla Structures, phases are used to break up a model into different sections. Phases are often used to indicate erection sequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects, and copy objects from other models, according to their phase number.
Check objects by phases

1. Select Setup > Phase manager... to open the Phase manager dialog box. In our model, there are two different phases. We have named the phases Model1 and
Model2.

2. Select Model1. 3. Click Objects by phases.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

17

The objects that belong to the selected phase become highlighted.

Check phases by objects

1. Select any part in the model. 2. Click Phases by objects. The phase to which the selected part belongs becomes active on the Phase manager dialog.
3.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 several times selecting different parts, and by dragging an area selection containing several parts.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings > Phases

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

18

1.4 Lotting and Sequencer

Lotting
With lots you can group assemblies e.g. for transporting to site. The lotting tool can be used as a help when planning loading schemes. The lotting function keeps track of the weight and the number of assemblies of each lot, but not the physical size of the assemblies, such as the length of a beam. We will create some lots according to the following loading capacities: Lot 1 Lot 2 Lot 3 Lot 4 Lot 5
Create lots

17000 kg 20000 kg 20000 kg 20000 kg 18000 kg

1. Click Tools > Lotting . The Lotting dialog box opens.

2. Click Properties . The Lot properties dialog box opens. 3. Give the lot you are to create the name "First lot", the number "1" and the maximum weight 17000, and click Add.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

19

4. Create the rest of the lots by repeating step 3 for each lot with the information in the table above. Then click OK. 5. On the Lotting dialog box, select "1 First lot" on the list. In the model, select the columns on gridlines A and B holding down the Ctrl key. Then click Apply selected. 6. Assign the hollow-core slabs on the first floor between gridlines 4 and 5 to the second lot in the same way.

7. While selecting the slabs, check the Weight and Weight left values in the dialog. If they exceed the maximum weight of the lot, unselect the last slab.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

20

8. Then, select the third lot on the list. In the model, continue selecting the hollowcore slabs on the first floor until the lot is full, click Apply selected. 9. Repeat for the fourth lot. 10. For the fifth lot, select as many concrete beams as the lot allows.

If you do assign too much weight to a lot, Tekla Structures gives the following message:

You can either choose to continue, or correct the situation, by selecting Cancel. Now, when you select different lots in the Lotting dialog box, the parts belonging to each lot are highlighted in the model. Click OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

21

Sequencer
The sequencer is used, for example, for naming sequences and defining the order in which to erect members. For example, the columns of a steel frame can have a certain sequence. One part can belong to several sequences.
Create sequences

1. Click Tools > Sequencer . The Sequencer properties dialog box opens. 2. Type "Steel columns" as the sequence name.

3. Click Apply. 4. In the model, pick the steel columns on gridline A, one by one, starting from gridline 1, continuing with those on gridline B. (Tip: Apply the select filter for steel columns to make picking the right parts easier.) End the picking with Interrupt or the Esc key. In the dialog, the number 14 now appears in the Max number field. 5. Type a new name "Concrete columns" in the Sequence name field. 6. Click Apply. 7. In the model, pick the concrete columns on gridlines C, D, E and F, one by one, starting from gridline 1. (Tip: Use the select filter for concrete columns.) Again, end the picking with Interrupt or the Esc key. 8. In the same way, define a sequence called "Hollow-core slabs floor 1" for the hollow-core slabs on level +3850.

You can't add a new part to a sequence, unless the new part is at the end of the sequence. If the sequence changes, you must redefine that whole sequence.
Check the sequence number

You can check the name and number of a sequence using the Inquire object command.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

22

To check the name and number of a sequence using the Inquire object command, the sequence name must appear as a user-defined attribute in the objects.inp file. Objects.inp can be edited. (Example?)

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

23

1.5 Attributes and Attribute Import

You can see the attributes of any part by double-clicking it.
Check the attributes of a part

1. Double-click on one of the concrete columns in the model. A dialog called Tekla Structures Concrete column (1) opens. 2. Select the Status tab. You can see that there is no information here. 3. Close the dialog with OK. Now, let's input some information about the status of parts.

Define attributes via dialog

1. Activate the select filter COLUMN_CONCRETE.

2. Select all concrete columns in the model. 3. Holding down the Ctrl key, double-click on one of the highlighted columns to open the attributes dialog. 4. Select the Status tab. Fill in some information about the columns, see an example below.

5. Click Modify.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

24

However, there is a more efficient way of getting the attributes into your model. We can import the data as a file. This way, the persons at the building site, for example, can write such information as actual erection dates in an Excel sheet, which can be imported into the model in text file format. We will first need a csv format (= comma separated value) report file. In this example, we will use the report template Erection_planned_actual.csv.rpt.
Import attributes with txt file

1. Open the Report list and run the report Erection_planned_actual.csv from the whole model.

2. Open your model folder (Tools > Open model folder), and double-click on the csv file (Erection_planned_actual.csv) to open it in Microsoft Excel. It is located in the Reports folder. 3. Input actual erection dates for all parts of the model. Also write some text in the erection comment fields.

4. Save the file as a tab-delimited text file - Text (Tab delimited (*.txt)), and shorten the name to Erection_plan_act.csv.

5. Close the file. 6. Select File > Import > Attributes . 7. In the Import Attribute dialog, browse with the () button to select the input file (Erection_plan_act.txt). 8. Select the alternatives shown below, click Create.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

25

The file path of the input text file can contain a maximum of 79 characters, which is why we shortened the file name of the text file. If the import doesn't work, try to shorten folder names or file names.

The attributes that you added in the Excel spreadsheet are now imported into your model. To see the Erection comment field on the attributes dialog, we need to edit objects.inp file a little (we added the text INSTALL_COMMENT). Also, the file import_macro_data_types.dat must be edited. In the examples, the edited objects.inp and import_macro_data_types.dat files are assumed to be in use.
Check the attributes

Now, let's check that the attributes were imported correctly! 1. Double-click on any part. 2. Select the Status tab.
3.

Check the Actual Erection Date and Erection comment fields.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

26

(More on this?)

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

27

1.6 4D Tool
With the 4D tool (Tools > 4D ), we can visualize different attributes of our model objects on the time scale. Among other things, we can visualize the progress of the erection of a building. Let's do this, using the actual erection dates that we have just imported into our model.
Visualize the actual erection

1. Select Tools > 4D to open the 4D dialog. 2. Select the attribute you want to look at in the Action list, in this case Actual Erection Date. 3. Set the current date, it can be the first day of the period you want to look at. 4. Set the step to One day forward. (If the actual erection dates you defined in the import file span over months instead of days, select One week forward or 30 days forward!) 5. Set start and end dates for the period during which the actual erection takes place. 6. Select Coloring in the Visualisation drop-down menu.

Part in the model that have the current date that is shown on the dialog, are shown in green color, others in red. 7. Click Step. For each step, the parts with the current actual erection date become green.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

28

Select parts from model using reports

We will first create a report of all parts that are visible in the 4D tool window to be able to select parts based on it.
Create a report

1. Set Reporting to Full. 2. In the Template list, select the report template 4D_ID_SELECT_steel.rpt. 3. Click the Refresh button to show the report.

A list of the parts in the 4D view is displayed. The list updates automatically if you change the date by clicking the Step button. Now, let's select some parts and change their actual erection dates with the help of the report.
Change dates of parts

1. Select a line in the report.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

29

2. The corresponding part is selected in the model. 3. Right-click and click User-defined attributes . The attributes dialog opens. 4. Select the Status tab. 5. Select a date from the calendar.

6. Click Modify to assign the date to the selected part. 7. Select other parts that you want to assign the same date to, and click Modify again. 8. In the 4D dialog, click the Refresh button to update the report.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

30

Export updated dates

Now, we will export the changed data using the Erection_planned_actual.csv.rpt report. 1. Select those lines that you changed the erection date for in the 4D_ID_SELECT_steel list. Now, all the objects that you changed the erection date for are selected. 2. Click the Report icon to open the list of reports.

3. Select Erection_planned_actual.csv on the list. 4. Edit the name of the report file to something else, otherwise Tekla Structures will replace the previous file with the new one. 5. Click on the Create from selected button on the Report dialog.

The report file is created into the model folder and can be opened in Microsoft Excel, to be edited further, if you wish, and imported back to the model.

The 4D dialog
On the 4D dialog, we can select different actions, which are attributes of the objects, as well as different steps and different ways to visualize.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

31

Action

The above date attributes are included by default. If an attribute on the list has input on the attribute dialogs, it can be selected as a 4D action.

Step

For the step pace, there are also several alternatives: one day, one week, or 30 days, and forward or backward.
Visualization

There are several different possibilities for visualization.

If you select Coloring Incremental, in our case, the parts erected at the current date will be shown in green color, the parts not yet erected will be shown in red color, and the parts erected before the current date will be shown in grey color. If you want to check which parts do not yet have an actual erection date, you can use the Show objects that do not have a date alternative. You can also choose to show objects that have a date earlier, or later, than the current date.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

32

1.7 How to Show your Model to Others

Taking snapshots
Tekla Structures has a tool for taking snapshots of your model view: Window > Snapshot. You can also use the PrintScreen key on your keyboard, or any separate snapshot program, such as HyperSnap. Let's take a snapshot.
Take a snapshot

1. Select Window > Snapshot > Snapshot (view without borders). A message "Snapshot taken (<filename and location>)" is shown on the status bar at the bottom of the Tekla Structures window. 2. Select Tools > Open model folder. 3. Find the file snap_001.bmp, double-click on the filename to view the picture. Let's send a picture of a footing baseplate to the site. This time we want our picture to have a white background. We will also highlight a detail in the picture.

Take a snapshot with white background

1. Select the footing connection at the footing on gridline intersection C-7. 2. Right-click and select Create view > Component basic view. 3. Change the component view to shaded wireframe (use the shortcut Ctrl + 2). 4. Select Window > Snapshot > Snapshot.

5. In the Snapshot dialog, click Options . 6. In the Snapshot options dialog, select White background, and click OK.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

33

7. In the Snapshot dialog, tick the alternative Print to file and click Browse . 8. Define a file name, for example Footing_whitebackground, and click OK.

9. Click Capture. 10. Select Tools > Open model folder. 11. Find the file Footing_whitebackground, and open it to check it.
Edit the picture

12. Close the file, and reopen it in a picture editor by right-clicking on it and selecting Open With > Paint (or another picture editor). 13. Add a red circle to emphasize a detail in the picture and a text, for example as below!

14. Close the picture editor and save the picture. 15. Select the picture filename, right-click on it and select Send To > Mail recipient.

16. Type the e-mail address of the recipient in the To field, add a message and send the picture.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

34

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

35

Publishing the model as a web page

Any model created with Tekla Structures can be published for the Internet. Other persons can watch the model using any standard web browser (so Tekla Structures is not needed). This is an easy and effective way to show e.g. the current status of a model.
Publish model as a web page

1. Select File > Publish as Web page 2. Define a name for your web page file.

3. Click the Publish button. A separate Tekla Web Viewer window appears.
Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

36

4. Test the functions Pan, Rotate and Fly in Tekla WebViewer. See Help: System > Import and export > Tekla WebViewer. See Help: System > Import and export > Tekla WebViewer -> How to move and zoom? To e-mail a published model, zip the entire PublicWeb folder. Remember to use the folder structure. Then, attach the .zip file to an email message and send it to the recipient. The recipient can then unzip the files and save the contents. When you receive a zipped WebViewer model, ensure you keep the folder names when you unzip it. To open the model, double-click the index.html file.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

37

1.8 Reports
We will now check the marks assigned to parts, assemblies and cast units.
Inquire part

1. Select Inquire > Object 2. Select any column. The Inquire object dialog box opens. Now the steel columns have Part position and Assembly position numbers and concrete columns cast unit numbers (the position numbers may differ in your model).

We will next create assembly part list and cast unit list of the whole model. Help: Drawing > Printing > Printing reports > Producing reports on entire model
Create assembly part list and cast unit list

1. Click on the Report icon to display the Report dialog box.

2. Select Assembly_part_list report template from the list.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

38

3. On the Options tab, select the options as shown below.

4. Click Create from all to run a report on the entire model. The report is now automatically displayed in a dialog. Also the text file is created in the model folder.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

39

5. Repeat the procedure above to create a cast unit list of the entire model. We will next create a cast unit list of all the concrete columns in our model. We will name the report with a specific name in order to keep the information on the stage of the project. To keep the report files you have created give them a specific name. If you try to create a report with the existing name, Tekla Structures asks before it overwrites the existing report.

Create cast unit list of concrete columns

1. Use the select filter COLUMN_CONCRETE to select all the concrete columns. 2. In the Report dialog box, edit report file name to read: cast_unit_list_COLUMN_<insert_today's_date>.xsr. (See picture below.) 3. (Next time you create the cast unit list of columns just change the date)

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

40

4. Click Create from selected. 5. The report is now displayed in a dialog box. 6. Select Tools > Open model folder to check that the actual text file appears in the model folder.

When you select a list entry that contains the ID numbers of the parts or assembly, Tekla Structures highlights them in the model.

Study different reports and check part marks

Tekla Structures can produce many different reports from the information contained in the model. Study the available reports. You can also print the report with the Print option.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

41

Create reports
Create the following reports and check the model: Part_list - Check the plate thicknesses for abnormalities Part_list - Check zero lengths of material Part_list - Check the steel grades Assembly_part_list - Check the main item profile (plates or flats may indicate incorrect welding) Cast_list - Check the main item profile Material_list Check the grades used are correct Rebar_schedule_FIN - Check the number and types of rebars

Other checks
Here are some other ways to check your model:
check.

Clash check the entire model: Select parts (or entire model), Tools > Clash Highlight the clashing parts in the model by selecting lines in the clash list. Check the erect ability of precast members.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

42

1.9 Drawings
In Project Manager, you can open drawings from the drawing list, and check them.

You can use the drawing list to: select and open the drawings for viewing display and filter drawings shown in the list choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the selected parts in the list (not available for GA drawings) modify user-defined attributes of one or several drawings at a time. The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawing size and type, etc. In some cases, the drawings of the project are not on the drawing list, and the functionalities described above are not available to you. This depends on whether the company who has done the design wants to make the drawings available via Tekla Structures or not. Let's check some drawings.
Check drawings

1. Open the first drawing on the list. 2. View the drawing. 3. Right-click on the drawing and select Properties . 4. On the Drawing properties dialog, click User-defined attributes .
5.

Mark your initials and the date of checking.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

43

6. Click Modify and OK. 7. Press Ctrl + Page Down to open the next drawing on the list. 8. Repeat the checking (steps 2-6). 9. In the drawing list, scroll to the right to see the user-defined attributes.

You can also just view a number of drawings one by one (with Ctrl + Page Down or Page Up), then close the last one, and with Ctrl or Shift select all the viewed drawings on the list, right-click and change their attributes all at once.

Copyright 2005 Tekla Corporation

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING Project Manager

44